Sei sulla pagina 1di 268

Service Manual R8605B Type M301, M302 System Analysis and Measurement Centre

M301, M302 System Analysis and Measurement Centre Service Manual

Volume 2

Note to Users This Service Manual is constructed using a system of issue letters (alphas) immediately following the reference number, eg. 5943A denotes A as being the first issue. This rule applies both to the overall volume reference and to its individual chapters, but is applied to each, separately, whenever important amendments are made. Therefore, the increment issue letter of any given chapter may not match that of the main volume.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605B Volume 2 Contents

SAFETY SECTION CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 3 CHAPTER 4 CHAPTER 5 INTRODUCTION INSTALLATION COMMISSIONING PROBLEM ANALYSIS SCADA INFORMATION

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605B Volume 2 Contents

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605B Volume 2 Contents

SAFETY SECTION
This Safety Section should be read before commencing any work on the equipment. Health and safety The information in the Safety Section of the product documentation is intended to ensure that products are properly installed and handled in order to maintain them in a safe condition. It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be familiar with the contents of the Safety Section. Explanation of symbols and labels The meaning of symbols and labels which may be used on the equipment or in the product documentation, is given below.

Caution: refer to product documentation

Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective/safety *earth terminal

Functional *earth terminal. Note: this symbol may also be used for a protective/ safety earth terminal if that terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly eg. power supply.

*Note:

The term earth used throughout the product documentation is the direct equivalent of the North American term ground.

Installing, Commissioning and Servicing


Equipment connections Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work on this equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety. The product documentation should be consulted before installing, commissioning or servicing the equipment. Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated. If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards. Voltage and current connections should be made using insulated crimp terminations to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety. To ensure that wires are correctly terminated, the correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire size should be used.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605B Volume 2 Contents

Before energising the equipment it must be earthed using the protective earth terminal, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment. Omitting or disconnecting the equipment earth may cause a safety hazard. The recommended minimum earth wire size is 2.5 mm2, unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the product documentation. Before energising the equipment, the following should be checked: Voltage rating and polarity; CT circuit rating and integrity of connections; Protective fuse rating; Integrity of earth connection (where applicable) Equipment operating conditions The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits. Current transformer circuits Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation. External resistors Where external resistors are fitted to relays, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns, if touched. Battery replacement Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended type and be installed with the correct polarity, to avoid possible damage to the equipment. Insulation and dielectric strength testing Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected. Insertion of modules and pcb cards These must not be inserted into or withdrawn from equipment whilst it is energised, since this may result in damage. Fibre optic communication Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605B Volume 2 Contents

Older Products
Electrical adjustments Equipments which require direct physical adjustments to their operating mechanism to change current or voltage settings, should have the electrical power removed before making the change, to avoid any risk of electric shock. Mechanical adjustments The electrical power to the relay contacts should be removed before checking any mechanical settings, to avoid any risk of electric shock. Draw out case relays Removal of the cover on equipment incorporating electromechanical operating elements, may expose hazardous live parts such as relay contacts. Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards When using an extender card, this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energised. This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards. Hazardous live voltages may be accessible on the extender card. Insertion and withdrawal of heavy current test plugs When using a heavy current test plug, CT shorting links must be in place before insertion or removal, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.

Decommissioning and Disposal


Decommissioning: The auxiliary supply circuit in the relay may include capacitors across the supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely isolating the supplies to the relay (both poles of any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to decommissioning. Disposal: It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided. The product should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any products containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of operation, may apply to the disposal of lithium batteries.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605B Volume 2 Contents

Technical Specifications
Protective fuse rating The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for this equipment is 6A, Red Spot type or equivalent, unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the product documentation. Insulation class: IEC 61010-1: 1990/A2: 1995 Class I EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995 Class I IEC 61010-1: 1990/A2: 1995 Category III EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995 Category III This equipment requires a protective (safety) earth connection to ensure user safety. Distribution level, fixed installation. Equipment in this category is qualification tested at 5kV peak, 1.2/50s, 500, 0.5J, between all supply circuits and earth and also between independent circuits. Compliance is demonstrated by reference to generic safety standards. Compliance with the European Commission Low Voltage Directive. Compliance is demonstrated by reference to generic safety standards.

Installation Category (Overvoltage):

Environment:

IEC 61010-1: 1990/A2: 1995 Pollution degree 2 EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995 Pollution degree 2 73/23/EEC

Product safety:

EN 61010-1:

1993/A2: 1995 EN 60950: 1992/A11: 1997

M301, M302 System Analysis and Measurement Centre Service Manual

Chapter 1 Introduction

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Contents 1 3 3 3 4 5 6 25 25 26 26 28 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

1. 2. 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.1.1 2.1.1.2 2.1.1.3 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 3.

INTRODUCTION TO MICOM M300 SERVICE MANUALS INTRODUCTION TO MICOM User interface and menu structure Menu structure and password protection Access level 0 Access level 1 Access level 2 Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records Communication ports user interface Courier communication interface ModBus communication interface MODEL IDENTIFICATION

FIGURE 1 MENU ACCESS LEVEL 0 FIGURE 2 MENU ACCESS LEVEL 1 FIGURE 3 MENU ACCESS LEVEL 2 FIGURE 4 PASSWORD ENTRY PROCEDURE FIGURE 5 MENU OVERVIEW FIGURE 6 LAYER 0 MENU FIGURE 7 LAYER 1 MENU FIGURE 8 LAYER 2 MENU: SYSTEM DATA FIGURE 9 LAYER 2 MENU: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FIGURE 10 LAYER 2 MENU: SYSTEM MODES FIGURE 11 LAYER 2 MENU: SYSTEM COMMANDS FIGURE 12 LAYER 2 MENU: DEMAND VALUES FIGURE 13 LAYER 2 MENU: TARIFF METER FIGURE 14 LAYER 2 MENU: VIEW RECORDS FIGURE 15 LAYER 2 MENU: DISTURBANCE RECORDER FIGURE 16 LAYER 2 MENU: COMMUNICATION SETTINGS FIGURE 17 LAYER 2 MENU: DEMAND CALCULATION FIGURE 18 LAYER 2 MENU: ANALOG OUTPUTS FIGURE 19 LAYER 2 MENU: RELAY OUTPUTS FIGURE 20 LAYER 2 MENU: OPTO INPUTS FIGURE 21 LAYER 2 MENU: SETPOINT GROUPS 1 TO 4 FIGURE 22 LAYER 2 MENU: TARIFF SETTINGS

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 1 of 28

Section 1.

INTRODUCTION TO MICOM M300 SERVICE MANUALS

This service manual provides a functional and technical description of the MiCOM M300 System Analysis and Measurement Centre range and a comprehensive set of instructions for the use and application of the unit. The generic description used for the product range in this manual is M300. There are two main product variants; one panel mounted and referred to throughout as M301, and the other DIN rail mounted and referred to as M302. The service manual is split into two volumes as follows: Volume 1 includes information on the application of the measurement centre and a technical description of its features. It is mainly intended for application engineers concerned with the selection and application of the product for measuring power system parameters. contains information on the installation and commissioning of the product, and also a section on fault finding. This volume is intended for test and commissioning engineers who are responsible for the installation and maintenance of the unit.

Volume 2

The introductory chapter is common to both volumes and includes: An introduction to the MiCOM range of products and the features and facilities which the range offers. A description of the user interface of the M301 to enable the user to start using the product. This concentrates on the menu structure and how to navigate it from the front of the unit. General technical statements. The chapter content within each volume is summarised below: Volume 1 Chapter 1 Engineering Volume Introduction Introduction to the MiCOM products and a guide to the user interface of the M300. Chapter 2 Applications Comprehensive and detailed description of the features of the product, the power system applications for which it is intended, and how to calculate and apply suitable settings to the unit. Chapter 3 Description Overview of the hardware and software in the unit along with a description of the internal operation of the unit. This chapter includes information on the self checking features and diagnostics of the product. Chapter 4 Specification Technical specifications of the product giving details of accuracy limits, recommended operating conditions, technical ratings and performance etc. Where appropriate the technical specifications are quoted in relation to the relevant technical standard(s).

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 2 of 28 Installation volume Introduction Introduction to the MiCOM products and a guide to the user interface of the M300.

Volume 2 Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Installation Contains recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of the product. A guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of the product is provided, which incorporates wiring diagrams and earthing details.

Chapter 3

Commissioning Instructions regarding how to commission the product on site, comprising checks on the calibration of the product, and directions on how to check the functionality of the product to prove it is in correct working order. This also includes a guide to entering the required product settings.

Chapter 4

Problem analysis This chapter provides advice on how to recognise failure symptoms and how to proceed in order to restore the product to a healthy condition.

Chapter 5

Communications and SCADA interface This chapter provides detailed information regarding the communication interfaces of the product, including a detailed description of the settings database stored inside and how to access it. The chapter also gives information on each of the communication protocols that can be used with the unit, and is intended to allow the user to design a custom interface to a SCADA system.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 3 of 28

Section 2.

INTRODUCTION TO MICOM

MiCOM is the new range of substation protection and control products from ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control. Central to the concept of MiCOM is communication; communication between the different products in the range and between the MiCOM products and substation control and SCADA systems. This enables MiCOM to provide a comprehensive range of integrated protection and control equipment which is capable of fulfilling all substation requirements. The MiCOM range includes a wide selection of protection relays (the P series), measurement products for accurate metering and monitoring (the M series) and versatile communication support packages for personal computer interrogation of the products (the S series). All MiCOM products include facilities for recording a multitude of information on the state and behaviour of the power system through disturbance and fault records, but also can provide measurements of the system at regular intervals to a control centre to enable remote monitoring and control to take place. There are several personal computer based support software packages in the MiCOM range which are custom designed for use with the other MiCOM products: MiCOM M300 setting software is designed for local control of a single measurement centre and provides facilities for changing product settings and viewing measurands. This package communicates via the ModBus protocol. MiCOM S1 is designed for local control of a single relay and provides facilities for operations such as changing the relay settings, programming the protection scheme logic and extracting disturbance and fault records. This package communicates via the Courier protocol. MiCOM S10 provides substation-wide communication with many MiCOM products and is capable of extracting and displaying measurements from an entire substation. Also MiCOM S1 can be combined with MiCOM S10 to allow control of the relay settings for all MiCOM devices within a substation. The range of measurement products in the MiCOM range presently includes the following products: M100 panel mounted energy meters M210 system measurement centre M300 system analysis and measurement centre For up-to-date information on any of the products in the MiCOM range see the latest MiCOM publications. 2.1 User interface and menu structure The settings and functions of the M300 can be accessed from either the front panel or rear communications port. The M302 has only communications ports and no local user interface. 2.1.1 Menu structure and password protection The front panel user interface is arranged in a hierarchical structure which is designed to provide an intuitive interface eliminating the need for constant recourse to the service manual. There are three main layers to the menu. Layer 0 of

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 4 of 28

the menu allows access to the measured parameters. Layer 1 allows access to the different setting groups. Once the appropriate setting group that requires changing is located then access can be gained to the actual setting. Different password access levels are allotted according to the security criteria of individual settings. 2.1.1.1 Access level 0

To set access to level 0 Layer 0 menu

Layer 1 menu Level 0 or Level 1 Level 2 System data

Layer 2 menu or

Password control

Enter password - see text or Access level 0

Figure 1
With this access level set only level 0 settings can be changed without the entrance of a password. The only setting that can be changed is that of the Real Time Clock.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 5 of 28

2.1.1.2 Access level 1


To set access to level 1 Layer 1 menu Device settings or Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Layer 2 menu or

System data

Password control

Enter password - see text or Access level 1

Figure 2
With this access level set only level 0 and 1 settings can be changed without the entry of a password. The settings available include: Real Time Clock Clear all event records Clear waveform capture and all disturbance records All other reset commands

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 6 of 28

2.1.1.3 Access level 2:


To set access to level 2 Layer 0 menu Device settings

Level 0 Level 1 Level 2

Layer 1 menu

or

System data

Layer 2 menu or

Password control

Enter password - see text or Access level 2

Figure 3
All settings are now available to the operator without entering passwords. If a setting requires a password to be entered then the following procedure should be followed:

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 7 of 28


Password setting Enter Level 1 or 2 Password: ****

Z, Y, X etc.

or then

A, B, C etc.

or Enter Level 1 or 2 Password: P*** Z, Y, X etc. or then A, B, C etc.

Enter Level 1 or 2 Password: P1** Z, Y, X etc. or then A, B, C etc.

Enter Level 1 or 2 Password: P1A* Z, Y, X etc. or then A, B, C etc.

Figure 4
The three menu layers of the unit can be navigated using the key presses shown in Figure 5 below. Pressing and holding a key will cause the unit to automatically step around the layer (auto repeat function).

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 8 of 28


Layer 0 menu

Current displays

Power displays

Voltage displays

Power factor

MiCOM M300 Measurement Centre anti-clockwise rotation Pulsed input displays System frequency clockwise rotation

Energy displays

Maximum demand displays

DC input

Layer 1 menu

Return to previous menu

Demand and tariffs System commands

Record views and settings

Communications settings

System data

Demand settings

anti-clockwise rotation Setpoints and tariffs

clockwise rotation Analogue outputs

Opto inputs

Relay outputs

Return to previous menu Layer 2 menu

anti-clockwise rotation

clockwise rotation Opto input 2

Opto input 1

Actual setting change Actual setting change

Figure 5

Menu overview

MiCOM M300

Volts NPS Neutral current = AMPS NPS = Ia Ib Ic %THD Ia Ib Ic

Measurement Centre

Van Vbn Vcn Van Vbn Vcn %THD Vab Vbc Vca %THD

Vab Vbc Vca

Time into period x into y min Ia Ib Ic MD A

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

pulsed input 2

No effect Rotate right

Real power Ph A

pulsed input 1

Real power Ph B

C
Real power Ph C

dc input

System frequency

Real power Total

MD PF

Rotate left No effect

Go to next menu level settings

Reactive power Ph A

MD leading kvar

Reactive power Ph B

MD lagging kvar

Reactive power Ph C

MD (-) kVA

Reactive power Total

MD (+) kVA

Apparent power Ph A

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 9 of 28

MD export kW Lagging energy

MD import kW

Leading energy

Export energy

Import energy

PF =

Apparent power Total

Apparent power Ph C

Apparent power Ph B

Figure 6

Layer 0 menu

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

System Data System modes System commands Demand values Tariff meter

System configuration

Tariff settings

Return to previous menu Rotate right

View records

Setpoint group 4

Disturbance recorder

Rotate left No effect

Go to next menu level settings


Communications settings

Setpoint group 3

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 10 of 28

Setpoint group 2 Opto inputs

Setpoint group 1

Relay outputs

Analog outputs

Demand calculation

Figure 7 Layer 1 menu

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Language Password Description Plant reference

Level 2 password
Rotate right

Return to previous menu

Model number

C
Serial number

Level 1 password

Rotate left Enter setting change menu

More detail where needed

Password control

Software ref 1

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 11 of 28

Active access level Relay output status

Opto input status

Software ref 2

Figure 8 Layer 2 menu: System data

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Fitted hardware Display mode

Comms protocol

Return to previous menu Rotate right

Max clock synch interval


Rotate left Enter setting change menu More detail where needed

LCD backlight

Clock synch

Real time clock

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 12 of 28

Figure 9

Layer 2 menu: System configuration

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Connection mode CT primary

Power flow mode

Return to previous menu Rotate right

Rotate left Enter setting change menu

No effect

VT secondary

VT primary

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 13 of 28

CT secondary

Figure 10 Layer 2 menu: System modes

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Clear to reset: Energy meter Clear to reset:


Energy and demand

Clear to reset: Demand

Return to previous menu Rotate right

Enter to capture

C ph fast waveform
No effect Enter setting change menu

Clear to reset: Pulse counts


Rotate left

Enter to capture

Enter to capture A ph fast waveform

Clear to restore Password protection

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 14 of 28

B ph fast waveform

Figure 11 Layer 2 menu: System commands

Maximum demands Maximum demands present day since last reset

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Demands for previous period

Return to previous menu Rotate right

Maximum demands

Maximum demands

day 7

day 1

Rotate left Enter setting change menu

Maximum demands

More detail where necessary

Maximum demands day 2

day 6

Maximum demands day 4

Maximum demands

Maximum demands day 3

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 15 of 28

day 5

Figure 12 Layer 2 menu: Demand values

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Settings status
Rate register 1

Active rate register

Return to previous menu Rotate right

Rate register 8

Rate register 2

Rotate left Enter setting change menu

Rate register 7

More detail where necessary

Rate register 3

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 16 of 28

Rate register 6

Rate register 5

Rate register 4

Figure 13 Layer 2 menu: Tariff meter

Clear to

0: <error>

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Number of records
clear event records

Return to previous menu Rotate right

nth: <error>

1: <error>

Rotate left Enter setting change menu

6: <error>

More detail where necessary

2: <error>

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 17 of 28

5: <error>

4: <error>

3: <error>

Figure 14 Layer 2 menu: View records

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Recorder status <Status>

Samples per cycle

Record config

Return to previous menu Rotate right

Post trigger cycle

Clear to clear wave cap & Dist rec


Rotate left Enter setting change menu More detail where necessary

Set point triggers

Enter to trigger

Records stored

Opto input triggers

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 18 of 28

disturbance recorder

Figure 15 Layer 2 menu: Disturbance recorder

Modem control lines: ModBus baud rate: <Baud rate>

ModBus address

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

<Status>

Return to previous menu Rotate right

IEC 870 framing

ModBus framing: <>


No effect Rotate left Enter setting change menu

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 19 of 28

IEC 870 baud rate

Courier address

Figure 16 Layer 2 menu: Communication settings

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Function: <window type>

Return to previous menu Rotate right

No effect Rotate left Enter setting change menu

Demand period

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 20 of 28

Figure 17 Layer 2 menu: Demand calculation

Analog output 1: Analog output 2: <assignment>

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

<assignment>

Return to previous menu Rotate right

No effect Rotate left Enter setting change menu

Analog output 4:

Analog output 3: <assignment>

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 21 of 28

<assignment>

Figure 18 Layer 2 menu: Analogoutputs

Relay 1 assignment: Relay 2 assignment: <assignment>

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

<assignment>

Return to previous menu Rotate right

No effect Rotate left Enter setting change menu

Relay 4 assignment:

Relay 3 assignment: <assignment>

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 22 of 28

<assignment>

Figure 19 Layer 2 menu: Relay outputs

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Opto input 1: <assignment>

Return to previous menu Rotate right

No effect Enter setting change menu

Rotate left

Opto input 2: <assignment>

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 23 of 28

Figure 20 Layer 2 menu: Opto inputs

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 24 of 28

Setpoint group 1 is used in the example but all other groups are available in the same format.

Setpoint group 1 delay: <delay>

Setpoint G1, E1: <assignment>

Setpoint G1, E2: <assignment>

Return to previous menu Rotate right

Setpoint G1, E8: <assignment>

C
Setpoint G1, E3: <assignment>
More detail where necessary

Rotate left

Setpoint G1, E7: <assignment>

Enter setting change menu

Setpoint G1, E6: <assignment>

Setpoint G1, E5: <assignment>

Setpoint G1, E4: <assignment>

Figure 21 Layer 2 menu: setpoint groups 1 to 4

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 25 of 28

Rate switching events 1 - 12

Rate switching events 13 - 24

Rate switching events 25 - 36

Return to previous menu Rotate right

Rate register data source

C
Rate switching events 37 - 48
More detail where necessary

Rotate left

Fixed date exlusions

Enter setting change menu

Fixed day exclusions

Switching events in season

Season switching events

Figure 22 Layer 2 menu:

Tariff settings

The front panel will return to a default display if the front panel interface is inactive for more than 15 minutes. If this happens any setting changes which have not been confirmed will be lost and the original setting values maintained. The default display is the layer 0 menu position last displayed by the unit. 2.2 Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records The presence of one or more alarm messages will be indicated by the ALARM LED being illuminated on the M301. (The M302 has no display so access to alarms is via the serial communications only.) The alarm messages can be viewed by repeated pressing of the READ key and will appear in sequential order. When all alarms have been viewed, but not cleared, the ALARM LED will continue to be illuminated. Pressing the CLEAR key will clear all alarm messages. 2.3 Communication ports user interface The Measurement Centre has two communication ports located on the rear of the unit: A 9 pin D-type connector which can be configured to be an RS232 ModBus port or an IEC 870 Courier port.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 26 of 28

A set of screw terminals for connection via twisted pair wiring and RS485 communication to a master terminal at a more distant location (up to 1000m). This is designed for use with a permanently wired communication system covering, for example, a whole substation, and can connect a number of units to a single master station for monitoring and control purposes. This port can be configured as a either a K-BUS COURIER port or RS 485 ModBus port. 2.4 Courier communication interface Courier is the communication language developed by ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control to allow remote interrogation of its range of protection relays and is fully supported by the MiCOM range. Courier works on a master/slave basis where the slave units contain information in the form of a database, and respond with information from the database when it is requested by a master unit. The Measurement Centre is a slave unit which is designed to be used with a Courier master unit such as MiCOM S1, PAS&T, ACCESS or a SCADA system. The operations and functions supported by Courier communications are as follows: display and modification of all settings extraction of digital status extraction of measurements extraction of fault records extraction of event and alarm records manual extraction of disturbance records reset of alarm conditions clearing of event records time synchronisation automatic extraction of event and disturbance records 2.5 ModBus communication interface ModBus is another master/slave communication protocol which can be used for network control. In a similar fashion to Courier, the system works by the master device initiating all actions and the slave devices (the Measurement Centres) responding to the master by supplying the requested data or by taking the requested action. ModBus communication can be held over the RS232 or RS485 links provided (but not at the same time). Using the RS485 port up to 32 slave devices can be connected together over a distance of up to 1000m.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 27 of 28

The operations and functions supported by ModBus communications are as follows: display and modification of all settings extraction of digital status extraction of measurements extraction of fault records extraction of event and alarm records manual extraction of disturbance records reset of alarm conditions clearing of event records time synchronisation automatic extraction of event and disturbance records

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 1 Page 28 of 28

Section 3.

MODEL IDENTIFICATION
M 3 0 0 0 0 0 A

Numeric instrumentation

Application Panel mounted energy meter System measurement centre System analysis and measurement centre Disturbance recorder Variant: Measurement centre with display Measurement centre without display Vx Aux rating: 24...70V dc 70...250V ac or dc In/Vn Rating: 1A, up to 440V 5A, up to 440V Hardware Base model - No output relays, No analogue outputs, No status inputs and no dc input Option 1 - Base model plus output relays and status inputs Option 2 - Base model plus analogue outputs and dc input Option 3 - Base model plus output relays, status inputs, analogue outputs and dc inputs Product No dc input DC input 0...200mV DC input 0...5V DC input 0...250V DC input 0...20mA Protocol options: RS232 ModBus & KBUS Courier RS485 ModBus & IEC Courier Mounting: Panel DIN rail Language: Multilingual Spare: 0 P D 2 4 0 1 2 3 4 3 0 1 2 1 5 L H 01 02 1 2 3 4

Design suffix:

For example, a Measurement Centre with display, and fully equipped with output relays, status inputs, 4 analogue outputs, a 4...20mA DC input, the RS485 set to MODBUS protocol and the RS232 set to Courier, with a 5A input and a 220V Auxilliary requirement would have the model number M301H5344P0000A

M301, M302 System Analysis and Measurement Centre Service Manual

Chapter 2 Installation

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 2 Contents 1 1 1 1 2 4 4 2 2 3

1. 1.1 1.2 2. 3. 4. 5.

GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS Receipt of M300 Electrostatic discharge HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT UNIT MOUNTING AND CONNECTION UNPACKING STORAGE

FIGURE 1 M301 CASE OUTLINE AND DIMENSIONS FIGURE 2 M302 CASE OUTLINE AND DIMENSIONS FIGURE 3 EXTERNAL WIRING DIAGRAM

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 2 Page 1 of 4

Section 1.
1.1

GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

Receipt of M300 The M300, although generally of robust construction, requires careful treatment prior to installation on site. Upon receipt, units should be examined immediately to ensure no damage has been sustained in transit. If damage has been sustained during transit a claim should be made to the transport contractor and ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control Ltd should be promptly notified. Units that are supplied unmounted and not intended for immediate installation should be returned to their protective polythene bags.

1.2

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) M300 has components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharges but the electronic circuits are well protected by the case. There are no setting adjustments within the unit and the M300 is not designed to be dismantled, considerable effort being required to do so. Touching the printed circuit boards should be avoided, since complementary metal oxide semiconductors (CMOS) are used, which can be damaged by static electricity discharged from the body.

Section 2.

HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor components when handling electronic circuits can cause serious damage, which often may not be immediately apparent but the reliability of the circuit will have been reduced. The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case. Do not expose them to risk of damage by withdrawing modules unnecessarily. Each unit incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor components. However, if it becomes necessary to dismantle a unit, the following precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which the unit has been designed and manufactured. 1. Before dismantling a unit, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as the unit by touching the unit case earth. 2. Handle printed circuit boards by their edges. Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit track or connectors. 3. Do not pass the printed circuit boards to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential. 4. Place the printed circuit boards on an antistatic surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same potential as yourself. 5. Store or transport the printed circuit boards in a conductive bag.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 2 Page 2 of 4

If you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of a unit in service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the unit's case earth with a conductive wrist strap. Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between 500k - 10M. If a wrist strap is not available you should maintain regular contact with the case earth to prevent a build-up of static. Instrumentation which may be used for making measurements should be earthed to the case earth whenever possible. More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be found in BS5783 and IEC 147-OF. It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry or modification work should be carried out in a special handling area such as described in the above-mentioned BS and IEC documents.

Section 3.

UNIT MOUNTING AND CONNECTION

Units are dispatched individually for panel (M301) or DIN rail (M302) mounting. Mounting details are shown in Figures 1 and 2.

MiCOM M300

142.5

OUT OF SERVICE SETPOINT TRIP ALARM

CLEAR READ ENTER

193.5

119.5 136.4 186 + 1.1 Panel cut-out details

138 + 1.0

Figure 1

M301 case outline and dimensions

239.5

COM1

COM2

MiCOM M300
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 MA LA

B A SCN

142.5

CURRENT MB LB MC LC

22 23 24 RESET

145.0

Figure 2

M302 case outline and dimensions

+ RL1 1 4 RL2 8 9 10 11 RL4 12 S2 14 15 A02 23 A03 A04 13 17


Analogue outputs Relay outputs

2 6 7

Auxiliary supply Vx

+ RL3 19 S1 3

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

DC analogue input

Opto inputs

20 18 22 A01

A 16

24 21 M La B SCN M Lb 1 DCD 2 Rx 3 Tx 4 DTR 5 Signal Ground 6 DSR


Case earth connection

A COM2

Options 0 1 2 3 No relay outputs, no analogue charge outputs, no DC analogue inputs and upto inputs Relay outputs and opto unputs Analogue outputs and DC analogue inputs Relay outputs, opto inputs, analogue outputs and DC analogue inputs

Load

M Lc

P1

S1

S1

S1

COM1

P2

S2

S2

S2

7 RTS 8 CTS

The electrical connections should be made in accordance with the external connection diagram shown in Figure 3.

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 2 Page 3 of 4

Figure 3

External wiring diagram

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 2 Page 4 of 4

Section 4.

UNPACKING

Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the units so that none of the parts is damaged. Units must only be handled by skilled persons. The installation should be clean, dry and reasonably free from dust and excessive vibration. The site should be well lit to facilitate inspection. Prior to installation, units should not be left in situations where they are exposed to dust or damp. This particularly applies to instalations which are being carried out at the same time as construction work.

Section 5.

STORAGE

If units are not to be installed immediately upon receipt they should be stored in a place free from dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-humidifier bags have been included in the packing they should be retained. The action of the de-humidifier crystals will be impaired if the bag has been exposed to ambient conditions and may be restored by gently heating the bag for about an hour, prior to replacing it in the carton. Dust which collects on a carton may, on subsequent unpacking, find its way into the unit; in damp conditions the carton and packing may become impregnated with moisture and the de-humidifier will lose its efficiency. Storage temperature 25C to +70C.

M301, M302 System Analysis and Measurement Centre Service Manual

Chapter 3 Commissioning

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Contents 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 8 8 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13

1. 2. 3. 3.1 3.2 4. 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.7 4.2.8 4.2.9 4.2.10 4.2.11 4.2.12 4.2.13 4.2.14 4.2.15 4.2.16 4.2.17 4.2.18 4.2.19 5. 5.1 5.2 6. 7 7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.2.5

INTRODUCTION PRODUCT MENU FAMILIARISATION EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR TESTING Minimum equipment required Additional equipment PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS With the unit de-energised PVI: Visual inspection PVS: Insulation PV3: External wiring With the unit energised PV4: Light emitting diodes (M301 only) PV4: Set the real-time clock PV4: Reset alarms PV4: Test the "Set point" and "Trip" LEDs (M301 only) PV5: Liquid crystal display (M301 only) PV6: Establish local communications PV7: Set the real-time clock (M302 only) PV8: Relay outputs (when fitted) PV8: Testing alarm outputs PV9: Opto inputs (when fitted) PV10: Settings PV10: Apply settings PV10: Verify settings PV11: Voltage and current inputs PV11: Voltage inputs PV11: Current inputs PV12: Analogue outputs (when fitted) PV13: Communication ports for remote communications PV14: DC input (when fitted) WIRING VERIFICATION TEST Voltage connections Current connections FINAL CHECKS MAINTENANCE Remote testing Alarms Measurement accuracy Local testing Alarms Measurement accuracy Check output contacts Analogue outputs Additional tests

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Contents 15 19

8. 9.

COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD SETTING RECORD

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 1 of 38

Section 1.

INTRODUCTION

The M300 products are fully numerical in their design, implementing all functions in software. They employ a high degree of self checking so that, for the majority of failures that could occur within the product, all functions will cease to operate and an error will be flagged. As a result of this, the commissioning tests do not need to be as thorough as with products using electromechanical and discrete electronic components. To commission the M300, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning correctly and the application-specific software settings have been applied to the unit. It is also considered unnecessary to test every function of the unit if the settings have been verified by one of the following methods: Extracting the settings applied to the M300 unit using appropriate setting software (preferred method) Via the operator interface (M301 Measurement Centre only). The number of tests to be performed will depend on the hardware option that has been installed in the unit. The hardware option installed can be found from the Fitted Hardware window under the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION heading or directly from the seventh character in the units model number. Table 1 details the tests that need to be performed for each hardware option. Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the customer will be responsible for the correct selection of settings and any interwiring between units. Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided at the end of this chapter for completion as required. BEFORE COMMISSIONING THE M300, REFER TO THE SAFETY AND INSTALLATION SECTIONS OF THE MANUAL.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 2 of 38

Test

Hardware option (seventh character of model number) 0 No options 1 Relay outputs Status inputs 2 Analogue Outputs DC input 3 Relay outputs Status inputs Analogue Outputs DC input

PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4 PV5 PV6 PV7 PV8 PV9 PV10 PV11 PV12 PV13 PV14

Table 1

Tests to be performed

Section 2.

PRODUCT MENU FAMILIARISATION

When commissioning an M301 for the first time, an hour should be allowed to become familiar with the menu. Chapter 1 contains a description of the menu structure. Similarly, if a portable PC with appropriate software is being used to set the unit, time should be allowed to become familiar with the associated setting software. This software is essential for setting the M302 because it does not have an integral user interface. For details of the operation of this software, please refer to the associated software user manual.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 3 of 38

Section 3.
3.1

EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR TESTING

Minimum equipment required Overcurrent test set. AC voltage source (if not included in the overcurrent test set) True rms measuring multimeter of known calibration accuracy with suitable ac and dc voltage and current ranges Audible continuity tester (if not included in multimeter) Electronic timer (if not included in the overcurrent test set) Phase angle meter Phase rotation meter A portable PC, with appropriate software (Essential for the M302 and testing the communications port on M301. Also recommended for setting M301.) Suitable DC source dependent on DC analogue input options.

3.2

Additional equipment A printer (for printing a setting record from the portable PC).

Section 4.

PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS

WARNING: BEFORE COMMISSIONING THE M300, THE SAFETY AND INSTALLATION SECTIONS OF THE MANUAL SHOULD BE REFERRED TO. The product verification tests cover all aspects of the product that need to be checked to ensure that the unit has not been damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning correctly and all measurements are within the stated tolerances. The voltage transformer supply to the unit should be isolated by means of the panel links or connecting blocks and the line current transformers should be shortcircuited and disconnected from the unit terminals . DANGER: NEVER OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE LETHAL AND COULD DAMAGE INSULATION. 4.1 With the unit de-energised The following group of tests should be carried out without the auxiliary supply or measured voltages or currents being applied to the unit. 4.1.1 PVI: Visual inspection Carefully examine the unit to see that no damage has occurred prior to commissioning. Check the rating information on the rating label of the unit to ensure it is correct for the particular installation. Regardless of whether a M301 or M302 is being commissioned, this label is located in the centre of the unit between the terminals. Ensure that the case earthing connection, located in the bottom corner near the right-hand terminal block, is used to connect the unit to a local earth bar.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 4 of 38

4.1.2

PV2: Insulation Insulation testing is not essential but may be required by the customer. If insulation tests are required, isolate all wiring from the earth and test the insulation with an electronic or brushless insulation tester at a dc voltage not exceeding 1000V. Terminals of M300 circuits of the same type should be temporarily wired together. The main groups of terminals on the unit are: a) Voltage transformer circuits b) Current transformer circuits c) Auxiliary voltage supply d) Status inputs e) DC Opto-isolated inputs f) Relay outputs g) RS232 Communication port (COM1) h) RS485 Communication port (COM2) i) j) Analogue outputs Earth tab

On completion of the insulation tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected to the unit. 4.1.3 PV3: External wiring Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant connection or scheme diagram. The connection diagram for the M300 can be found in Volume 2, Chapter 2 of this manual. 4.2 With the unit energised The following group of tests verify that the units hardware and software are applied and functioning correctly. They should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the unit but not the measured voltages or currents. There are two auxiliary voltage ranges available for the M300. The operating ranges are specified in Table 2. Without energising the unit, measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it is within the operating range. Auxiliary rating 24/70V 70/250V Operating range 19 to 84V dc only 56 to 275V dc or ac

Table 2

Operational range of auxiliary supply

It should be noted that the unit can withstand ac ripple of up to 12% of rated voltage on the dc auxiliary supply. The M300 units are protected against overloads created when batteries are removed and the charger is left in place. However, this mode of operation is not recommended as other units, such as protective relays, powered from the same supply may not have this overload protection. Energise the unit if the auxiliary supply is within the operating range.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 5 of 38

4.2.1

PV4: Light emitting diodes (M301 only) On power up, the top and bottom light emitting diodes (LEDs), Out of Service and Alarm respectively, should have illuminated and stayed on. The Out of Service LED is illuminated because the frequency tracking signal is not present and the Alarm LED because the real time clock needs to be set. The Out of Service LED will extinguish when rated AC quantities are applied to the voltage and current inputs. The Alarm LED will extinguish when the real time clock is set. The status of the other (Set Point and Trip) LEDs is stored in non-volatile memory which remembers whether they were on or off when the auxiliary supply was last removed from the unit. Therefore these indicators may also illuminate when the unit is powered up. Operator intervention is required to extinguish these LEDs.

4.2.2

PV4: Set the real-time clock The real-time clock cell is located in the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION menu. When the real time clock is displayed, the time and date are set by pressing the 'Enter' key to enter the setting mode. The up and down arrow keys can then be used to change the values, the left and right arrow keys allow changes to be made to the other values of the real time clock. Once the desired values are inserted press the Enter key to confirm settings.

4.2.3

PV4: Reset alarms All LEDs that are illuminated should be reset before proceeding with further testing. The Alarm LED should have reset when the real time clock was set. If the Set Point and Trip LEDs are illuminated and then successfully reset (the LEDs will extinguish), there is no testing required because the LEDs are known to be operational.

4.2.4

PV4: Test the Set Point and Trip LEDs (M301 only) If operation has not already been established, the Set Point and Trip LEDs can be tested by exceeding the threshold of a set point as in the following: Set one setpoint in a set point group to be a, set the set point time delay to be 1 second, set the high level to 50% and low level to 0%. Apply rated voltage and current to bring the unit into service. To test Set Point LED operation apply 50% of rated current to a, then raise to a level above 50%, which should illuminate the set point LED. (When the current is above 50% the set point alarm cannot be reset nor the LED extinguished). Reduce a to 40% of rated current, this will enable the set point alarm to be reset and the LED will extinguish. To test the operation of the Trip LED carry out the above test with one of the output relays configured to the corresponding set point group. The Trip LED should illuminate and extinguish as for the Set Point LED detailed above. This test should be repeated for all output relays.

4.2.5

PV5: Liquid crystal display (M301 only) There are no test routines for the liquid crystal display (LCD). The display itself can be checked by moving around the units menu looking for pixels (the dots on the display used to form the text) that are obviously not working. There is a backlight in the display that allows settings to be read in all conditions of ambient lighting. It is switched on and off via the LCD Backlight setting under

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 6 of 38

the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION menu heading. Check that it works if not already being used during testing. 4.2.6 PV6: Establish local communications Using a PC running the appropriate software establish local communications with the unit. To be able to establish communications with the unit it is necessary to set the communications settings in the PCs software to the units factory-set default settings, unless the customer has already changed them. If the latter is the case then the customers settings should be entered into the software. The default communication settings are: Comms protocol: Modbus address: Modbus baud rate: Modbus framing: Courier address: IEC870 baud rate: IEC870 frame: RS485 Modbus & IEC870 Courier 247 9600 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 2 stop bits, no parity 255 9600 FT1.2, 11 bits

First, establish communications between the software and the M301 or M302 unit. Should there be any problems in establishing communications with the M302 the RESET button can be pressed and the unit will return to the default communication settings. It is not essential to establish local communications with the M301 because any settings can be made using the front panel and values read using the LCD display. 4.2.7 PV7: Set the real-time clock (M302 only) If an M302 is being commissioned, the real-time clock will need to be set via the communications port before setting can proceed. 4.2.8 PV8: Relay outputs (when fitted) The relay outputs can be used either as alarm outputs which can be reset after the alarm condition has gone or as pulsed outputs for external energy counter applications (eg. kWh). The application to which each relay output has been configured should be determined so that the appropriate test procedure can be adopted. Table 3 gives the expected state for each relay output. The exception to this is when the relay outputs are configured as watchdog contacts, which have a normally closed configuration.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 7 of 38

Relay Output

Terminals

Contact Configuration Normally Open Normally Closed Alarm Trip Alarm Trip Open Alarm Trip Open Alarm Reset Closed

1 2 3 4

5 and 6 7 and 9 9 and 10 11 and 12

Closed

Table 3
4.2.9

Contact status

PV8: Testing alarm outputs To test the relay outputs it is only necessary to test their operation rather than test each individual function that they can be configured to perform. Any relay outputs that have been set as an alarm contact can be tested using a continuity tester. All four relay outputs can be tested at once by configuring the same setpoint to act on all four relays then follow the procedure detailed in Section 4.2.4. The settings detailed in Section 4.2.4 will have to be applied to the M302 using the communications port and a PC running the appropriate software. After the time delay of the set point group, all four relay outputs will change state. The test should be carried out with the relay outputs being configured as normally open and normally closed contacts. The Set Point and Trip LEDs will also have illuminated to show that the measured quantity has moved to the operate side of the setpoint and a relay output has operated respectively (M301 only).

4.2.10

PV9: Opto inputs (when fitted) To test the status inputs set both the opto inputs to be configured as pulse counters in the OPTO INPUT menu. Apply rated voltage and current to bring the unit into service. Energise each status input from the dc auxiliary supply. The terminal connections are shown in Table 4. Status input Terminal 1 (S1) 19 (+ve) 18 (ve) 2 (S2) 20 (+ve) 18 (ve)

Table 4

Status input connections

To check the operation of the status inputs when configured as pulsed input counters, the counts for each pulsed input can be viewed from the measurement display for the M301 model, and using the communications and a PC running the appropriate software for the M302. Apply then remove the dc voltage to the input, the pulse counter should increase by one.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 8 of 38

4.2.11

PV10: Settings These tests ensure that all the predetermined settings for the particular installation (customers settings) have been correctly applied to the unit.

4.2.12

PV10: Apply settings Due to the versatility of the M300, it is necessary to apply the application-specific settings at an early stage of commissioning so as to avoid unnecessary tests and setting changes. There are two methods of applying the settings: Downloading them to the unit using a portable PC running the appropriate software through a communications port. If a setting file has been created by the customer and provided on a diskette, this will save time. Enter them manually via the units operator interface (M301 only). If the customer has changed the passwords to prevent unauthorised changes to some settings, either the revised level 2 password should be provided or the customer should restore the original password prior to commencement of testing. Note: In the event that the password has been lost, a recovery password can be obtained from ALSTOM by quoting the model and serial numbers of the particular unit. The recovery password is unique to that M300 unit and will not work on any other unit.

4.2.13

PV10: Verify settings The settings applied should be carefully checked against the customers desired settings to ensure they have been entered correctly. However, this is not considered essential if a customer prepared setting file has been downloaded to the unit using a portable PC running the appropriate software. There are two methods of verifying the settings: Compare a printed copy of the settings from the unit with the customers original setting sheet. Step through the settings using the units operator interface and compare them with the customers setting sheet (M301 only).

4.2.14

PV11: Voltage and current inputs These tests verify that the accuracy of current and voltage measurement is within the acceptable tolerances for the M300. Before testing, the voltage and current connections to the unit should be determined for the particular application so that the measured quantities can be applied to the correct inputs. This can be determined from the external wiring to the unit or the Connection Mode setting under the SYSTEM MODES heading and reference to Table 5.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 9 of 38


System Ia Current Ib Ic Va MC 22 LC 21 23 21 24 21 22 23 23 24 24 22 Vb Voltage Vc Vab Vbc Vca

Mode

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Terminals

Single phase 3 phase, 4 wire balanced 3 phase, 3 wire balanced 3 phase, 3 wire unbalanced 3 phase, 4 wire unbalanced 3 phase, 4 wire unbalanced 2 phase, 3 wire 3 phase, 3 wire balanced

MA MB LA LB

Table 5
4.2.15

Used inputs for each connection mode

PV11: Voltage inputs This test verifies the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptable tolerances. Apply rated voltage to all the voltage transformer inputs, checking the magnitude of each input using a multimeter and record the corresponding reading under the MEASUREMENT column heading. During testing the A phase voltage must always be energised with rated voltage to bring the unit into service. The units reading can either be in primary or secondary volts depending on the setting of Display Mode under the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION heading. If the Display Mode setting is Secondary, the measured voltage values on the unit should equal the applied voltage. Otherwise, if the Display Mode setting is Primary, the measured voltage values on the unit should equal the applied voltage multiplied by the voltage transformer ratio set using the VT Primary and VT Secondary settings under the SYSTEM MODES column heading. The measured voltage can be read directly from the LCD display on the M301 and via the communications interface and a PC running the appropriate software on the M302. The acceptable tolerance is 0.2% digital multi-meter accuracy.

4.2.16

PV11: Current inputs This test verifies the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances. Apply rated current to each current transformer inputs, checking the magnitude of each input using a multimeter and record the corresponding reading under the MEASUREMENT column heading. During testing the A phase voltage must always be energised with rated voltage to bring the unit into service. The units reading can either be in primary or secondary Amperes depending on the setting of Display Mode under the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION heading. If the Display Mode setting is Secondary, the measured current values on the unit should equal the applied current.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 10 of 38

Otherwise, if the Display Mode setting is Primary, the measured current values on the unit should equal the applied current multiplied by the current transformer ratio set using the CT Primary and CT Secondary settings under the SYSTEM MODES column heading. The current can be read directly from the LCD display on the M301 and via the communications interface and a PC running the appropriate software on the M302. The acceptable tolerance is 0.2% digital multi-meter accuracy. 4.2.17 PV12: Analogue outputs (when fitted) This test checks the operation and accuracy of the analogue outputs. The assignments of each of the four analogue outputs should have been determined by the customer and installed as part of the settings of the unit. The customer should also have calculations which give the expected values of each analogue output for a given input condition, these should be referred to when testing the analogue outputs. (In the absence of this information the expected values of the analogue outputs should be calculated for a definite value of applied voltage and current, given the settings applied to the unit). Apply the definite voltage and current values as detailed in the calculations and check the dc output current for each assigned analogue output with a multimeter, the terminal allocations are given in Table 6. Check these values against the expected values. The acceptable tolerance is 0.2% digital multi-meter accuracy.
Analogue output 1 2 3 4 Common Reference AO1 AO2 AO3 AO4 AOC Terminal 14 15 16 17 13

Table 6
4.2.18

Terminal allocations for analogue outputs

PV13: Communication ports for remote communications This test should only be performed where the unit is to be accessed from a remote location. If the settings have been successfully downloaded to the unit using a portable PC running the appropriate software then it has already been proved that local communications can be established. It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from the unit to the remote location, just the units communications port and, where applicable, the protocol converter. Connect a portable PC running the appropriate software to the incoming (remote) side of the protocol converter and ensure that the communications settings in application software is set the same as those on the M300. Check that communications can be established with the unit and check that measurements can be read by the communications. Check that the value seen on the display agrees with the value given by the communications (M301 only).

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 11 of 38

4.2.19

PV14: DC input (when fitted) If the opto-isolated dc input is being used, the range setting should be checked to ensure it is correct. This range is usually supplied factory-set to the customers preferred value and can be identified from the eighth character of the model number and reference to Table 7. If necessary, the setting can be changed using a jumper link internal to the units. (If it is necessary to change the jumper link seek advice from ALSTOM.)
8th Character 0 1 2 3 4 DC Input Range No dc input 0 to200mV 0 to 5V 0 to 250V 0 to 20mA

Table 7

DC input range setting

The dc input should be tested by applying a known dc voltage or current, as appropriate, and within the operational range selected, to the input terminals (terminal 4 to positive, 3 to negative). The percentage of full-scale deflection should read from the dc input window under the MEASUREMENTS heading for the M301 model, and using the communications and a PC running the appropriate software for the M302. Check that the displayed value is within 0.5% of the expected value.

Section 5.

WIRING VERIFICATION TEST

Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring that has been removed to allow testing. If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the unit in order to perform any of the above tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. The following on-load measuring test ensures that the external (customer) wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct but can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the energisation of the plant being monitored. Note: The following tests alone are not conclusive that the phase connections to the unit are correct. A phase angle measurement is required for conclusive testing. 5.1 Voltage connections Measure the voltage transformer secondary voltages to ensure they are correctly rated and, if possible, check that the system phase rotation is correct using a phase rotation meter. Compare the values of the secondary phase voltages with the units measured values, which can be found under the MEASUREMENT column heading. The units reading can either be in primary or secondary volts depending on the setting of Display Mode under the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION heading.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 12 of 38

If the Display Mode setting is Secondary, the measured voltage values on the unit should equal the applied voltage. Otherwise, if the Display Mode setting is Primary, the measured voltage values on the unit should equal the applied voltage multiplied by the voltage transformer ratio set using the VT Primary and VT Secondary settings under the SYSTEM MODES column heading. The acceptable tolerance is 0.2%, digital multi-meter accuracy. 5.2 Current connections Measure the current transformer secondary values and check that their polarities are correct by measuring the phase angle between the current and voltage. If the unit is connected to a balanced system, ensure the current flowing in the neutral circuit of the current transformers is negligible. Compare the values of the secondary phase currents with the units measured values, which can be found under the MEASUREMENT column heading. The units reading can either be in primary or secondary amperes depending on the setting of Display Mode under the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION heading. If the Display Mode setting is Secondary, the measured current values on the unit should equal the applied current. Otherwise, if the Display Mode setting is Primary, the measured current values on the unit should equal the applied current multiplied by the current transformer ratio set using the CT Primary and CT Secondary settings under the SYSTEM MODES column heading. The acceptable tolerance is 0.2%, digital multi-meter accuracy.

Section 6.

FINAL CHECKS

The tests are now complete. Ensure that all alarms and LEDs, as appropriate, have been reset before leaving the unit. If it is not necessary for the backlight to be left on, switching it off will marginally reduce the burden on the auxiliary supply (M301 only).

Section 7.

MAINTENANCE

The M300 units are fully numerical in their design, implementing all functions in software. They employ a high degree of self-checking so that, for the majority of failures that can occur within the unit, all functions will cease to operate and an error will be flagged. Depending on the failure and the hardware options fitted to the unit, the error will be seen as an alarm that can be accessed over the communication channel or by the operation of a watchdog contact. 7.1 Remote testing The M300 units are self-supervising and so require negligible maintenance. Most problems will result in an alarm so that remedial action can be taken.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 13 of 38

However, some periodic tests could be done to ensure that the unit is functioning correctly. If the M300 can be communicated with from a remote point, via its communication port, then some testing can be carried out without actually visiting site. 7.1.1 Alarms The alarm status should first be checked to identify if any alarm conditions exist. The alarm records can then be read to identify the nature of any alarm that may exist. 7.1.2 Measurement accuracy The values measured by the unit can be compared with known system values to check that they are in the approximate range that is expected. If they are, then the analogue/digital conversion and calculations are being performed correctly. 7.2 Local testing When testing locally, similar tests to those for remote testing may be carried out to check for correct functioning of the unit. 7.2.1 Alarms The alarm status LED should first be checked to identify if any alarm conditions exist. The alarm records can then be read to identify the nature of any alarm that may exist. 7.2.2 Measurement accuracy The values measured by the unit can be checked against known values injected into the unit via its terminal block. Suitable test methods will be found in Section 8 of this chapter which deals with commissioning. These tests will prove the calibration accuracy is being maintained. 7.2.3 7.2.4 Check output contacts Check that the output contacts are giving the correct output state. Analogue outputs Check that each analogue output is giving out the expected value using a multimeter. 7.2.5 Additional tests Additional tests can be selected from the Commissioning Instructions as required.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 14 of 38

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 15 of 38

Section 8.
Date Station

COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD

Circuit System Frequency

Rating label information System Analysis and Measurement Centre M30_ Model number Serial number Rated current n Rated voltage Vn Auxiliary voltage Vx *Delete as appropriate Product verification tests With the device de-energised PV1 Visual inspection Is the device damaged? Rating information correct? Case earth installed? PV2 PV3 Insulation tested? External wiring checked against diagram? With the Device Energised Auxiliary voltage to device Polarity checked ? PV4 Light Emitting Diodes (M301 only) Real-time clock set via user interface? Out of Service LED working? Alarm LED working? Set Point LED working? Trip LED working? PV5 Liquid Crystal Display (M301 only) All pixels working? Backlight switches on and off? PV6 Communications Ports Port Tested Communications working? V ac/dc* Yes/No/NA* Fitted/Not fitted* Yes/No/NA* Yes/No* Yes/No* Yes/No* Yes/No* Fitted/Not fitted* Yes/No* Yes/No* Used/Not used* RS232/RS485 Yes/No* Yes/No* Yes/No* Yes/No* Yes/No/NA* Yes/No/NA*

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 16 of 38 Real time clock set? (M302 only) Relay output 1 working? Relay output 2 working? Relay output 3 working? Relay output 4 working? Yes /No* Yes/No* Yes/No* Yes/No* Yes/No* Fitted/Not fitted* Yes/No* Yes/No* Yes/No*

PV7 PV8 PV8

Relay outputs (Hardware options 1 & 3) Fitted/Not fitted*

PV9

Status Inputs (Hardware options 1 & 3) Input S1 working? Input S2 working?

PV10 PV10

Settings Customers settings applied? If settings applied using a portable computer and software, which software and version was used?

PV10 PV11 PV11

Settings on device verified? Voltage and current inputs Connection mode Voltage inputs VT Primary VT Secondary Applied value

Yes/No*

Displayed value V V V V V V

Va Vb Vc PV11

Used/Not used* Used/Not used* Used/Not used* Current inputs CT Primary CT Secondary Applied value

Displayed value A A A A A A Fitted/Not fitted* F/Pt/Qt/St/PF/a/b/c/ Van/Vbn/Vcn/Vab/Vbc/ Vcn* V/na*

a b c
PV12

Used/Not used* Used/Not used* Used/Not used* Analogue Outputs (Hardware options 2 & 3) Analogue Output 1 (AO1) AO1 parameter

Voltage applied

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 17 of 38 Current applied Output from AO1 Expected output from AO1 Analogue output 2 (AO2) AO2 parameter F/Pt/Qt/St/PF/a/b/c/ Van/Vbn/Vcn/Vab/Vbc/ Vcn* V/na* A/na* mA* mA* F/Pt/Qt/St/PF/a/b/c/ Van/Vbn/Vcn/Vab/Vbc/ Vcn* V/na* A/na* mA* mA* F/Pt/Qt/St/PF/a/b/c/ Van/Vbn/Vcn/Vab/Vbc/ Vcn* V/na* A/na* mA* mA* Used/Not used RS232/RS485* Yes/No Fitted/Not fitted* to mV/V/mA* mV/V/mA* % Yes/No/na* Yes/No* A/na* mA* mA*

Voltage applied Current applied Output from AO2 Expected output from AO2 Analogue Output 3 (AO3) AO3 parameter

Voltage applied Current applied Output from AO3 Expected output from AO3 Analogue Output 4 (AO4) AO4 parameter

Voltage applied Current applied Output from AO4 Expected output from AO4 PV13 Remote Communications Ports Port tested? Communications working? PV14 DC Input (Hardware options (2&3) Range setting Value applied to terminals Displayed value Wiring verification test Disturbed wiring re-checked? On load tests On-load test performed?

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 18 of 38 Phase rotation correct? Yes/No*

Voltage Connections VT Primary VT Secondary Va Vb Vc (same as for Section 4.2.15) (same as for Section 4.2.15) Applied Value Used/Not used* Used/Not used* Used/Not used* (same as for 4.2.16) (same as for 4.2.16) V V V V V V V V V Displayed Value V V V

Current Connections CT Primary CT Secondary

a b c

Used/Not used* Used/Not used* Used/Not used*

Commissioning Engineer

Customer Witness

Date

Date

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 19 of 38

Section 9.
Date Station Circuit

SETTING RECORD
Engineer Date System Frequency

Rating label information The following information should be recorded from the rating label of the device. System Analysis and Measurement Centre Model number Serial number Rated current n Rated voltage Vn Auxiliary Voltage Vx Software installed The software issues or references used in the device should be recorded in the following table, these references are contained within the SYSTEM DATA menu. Software Ref 1 Software Ref 2 Settings The following sections list the settings that can be applied to the device in the relevant menus, these should be recorded where applicable. Each section and sub section refers to a specific menu heading and sub menu heading where applicable. System data Language Password Description Plant Reference Frequency Password Control Level 1 Password Level 2 Password M30_

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 20 of 38

System configuration Comms Protocol Display Mode LCD Backlight Real Time Clock Clock Synch Max Clock Synch Interval System Modes Connection Mode Power Flow Mode CT Primary CT Secondary VT Primary VT Secondary System Commands ENTER to Capture A ph Fast Wform Data ENTER to Capture B ph Fast Wform Data ENTER to Capture C ph Fast Wform Data Disturbance Recorder Samples per cycle Record Config Post Trigger Cycle Setpoint Triggers Opto Input Triggers Communications Settings Modem Control Lines Modbus Address Modbus Baud Rate Modbus Framing Courier Address IEC870 Baud Rate IEC870 Framing Demand Calculation Function Demand Period

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 21 of 38

Analogue outputs These settings only apply to devices with hardware options 2 & 3 installed. ANALOGUE OUTPUT 1 Analogue Output 1 Parameter Analogue Output 1 Full Scale Analogue Output 1 Slope Analogue Output 1 X-Breakpoint 1 Analogue Output 1 Y-Breakpoint 1 Analogue Output 1 Span ANALOGUE OUTPUT 2 Analogue Output 2 Parameter Analogue Output 2 Full Scale Analogue Output 2 Slope Analogue Output 2 X-Breakpoint 1 Analogue Output 2 Y-Breakpoint 1 Analogue Output 2 Span ANALOGUE OUTPUT 3 Analogue Output 3 Parameter Analogue Output 3 Full Scale Analogue Output 3 Slope Analogue Output 3 X-Breakpoint 1 Analogue Output 3 Y-Breakpoint 1 Analogue Output 3 Span ANALOGUE OUTPUT 4 Analogue Output 4 Parameter Analogue Output 4 Full Scale Analogue Output 4 Slope Analogue Output 4 X-Breakpoint 1 Analogue Output 4 Y-Breakpoint 1 Analogue Output 4 Span Note1 Setting is only applicable when dual slope is selected.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 22 of 38

Relay outputs These settings only apply to devices with hardware options 1 & 3 installed. RELAY OUTPUT 1 Relay 1 Assignment Relay 1 Label 1 Relay 1 Contacts 1 Import/Export kWh Full Scale 2 Import/Export kWh Pulse Rate 2 Import/Export kWh Pulse Duration 2 Import/export kVArh Full Scale 3 Import/export kVArh Pulse Rate 3 Import/export kVArh Pulse Duration 3 RELAY OUTPUT 2 Relay 2 Assignment Relay 2 Label 1 Relay 2 Contacts 1 Import/Export kWh Full Scale 2 Import/Export kWh Pulse Rate 2 Import/Export kWh Pulse Duration 2 Import/export kVArh Full Scale 3 Import/export kVArh Pulse Rate 3 Import/export kVArh Pulse Duration 3 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Relay 3 Assignment Relay 3 Label 1 Relay 3 Contacts 1 Import/Export kWh Full Scale 2 Import/Export kWh Pulse Rate 2 Import/Export kWh Pulse Duration 2 Import/export kvarh Full Scale 3 Import/export kvarh Pulse Rate 3 Import/export kvarh Pulse Duration 3

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 23 of 38

RELAY OUTPUT 4 Relay 4 Assignment Relay 4 Label 1 Relay 4 Contacts 1 Import/Export kWh Full Scale 2 Import/Export kWh Pulse Rate 2 Import/Export kWh Pulse Duration 2 Import/export kVArh Full Scale 3 Import/export kVArh Pulse Rate 3 Import/export kVArh Pulse Duration 3 Notes
1 2

Setting is only applicable when relay assignment is set to Setpoint Group. Setting is only applicable when relay assignment is set to Pulsed Import kWh or Pulsed Export kWh. Setting is only applicable when relay assignment is set to Pulsed import kVArh or Pulsed export kvarh.

Opto inputs These settings only apply to devices with hardware options 1 & 3 installed. OPTO INPUT 1 Opto Input 1 Assignment Opto Input 1 Label 1 OPTO INPUT 2 Opto Input 2 Assignment Opto Input 2 Label 1 Notes
1

Setting is only applicable when opto inputs are configured as Pulse Counters.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 24 of 38

Setpoint Group 1 Setpoint Group 1 Delay Setpoint G1,E1 (Assignment) Setpoint G1,E1 High Level Setpoint G1,E1 Low Level Setpoint G1,E2 (Assignment) Setpoint G1,E2 High Level Setpoint G1,E2 Low Level Setpoint G1,E3 (Assignment) Setpoint G1,E3 High Level Setpoint G1,E3 Low Level Setpoint G1,E4 (Assignment) Setpoint G1,E4 High Level Setpoint G1,E4 Low Level Setpoint G1,E5 (Assignment) Setpoint G1,E5 High Level Setpoint G1,E5 Low Level Setpoint G1,E6 (Assignment) Setpoint G1,E6 High Level Setpoint G1,E6 Low Level Setpoint G1,E7 (Assignment) Setpoint G1,E7 High Level Setpoint G1,E7 Low Level Setpoint G1,E8 (Assignment) Setpoint G1,E8 High Level Setpoint G1,E8 Low Level Setpoint Group 2 Setpoint Group 2 Delay Setpoint G2,E1 (Assignment) Setpoint G2,E1 High Level Setpoint G2,E1 Low Level Setpoint G2,E2 (Assignment) Setpoint G2,E2 High Level Setpoint G2,E2 Low Level Setpoint G2,E3 (Assignment) Setpoint G2,E3 High Level Setpoint G2,E3 Low Level

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 25 of 38

Setpoint G2,E4 (Assignment) Setpoint G2,E4 High Level Setpoint G2,E4 Low Level Setpoint G2,E5 (Assignment) Setpoint G2,E5 High Level Setpoint G2,E5 Low Level Setpoint G2,E6 (Assignment) Setpoint G2,E6 High Level Setpoint G2,E6 Low Level Setpoint G2,E7 (Assignment) Setpoint G2,E7 High Level Setpoint G2,E7 Low Level Setpoint G2,E8 (Assignment) Setpoint G2,E8 High Level Setpoint G2,E8 Low Level Setpoint Group 3 Setpoint Group 3 Delay Setpoint G3,E1 (Assignment) Setpoint G3,E2 High Level Setpoint G3,E3 Low Level Setpoint G3,E1 (Assignment) Setpoint G3,E2 High Level Setpoint G3,E2 Low Level Setpoint G3,E3 (Assignment) Setpoint G3,E3 High Level Setpoint G3,E3 Low Level Setpoint G3,E4 (Assignment) Setpoint G3,E4 High Level Setpoint G3,E4 Low Level Setpoint G3,E5 (Assignment) Setpoint G3,E5 High Level Setpoint G3,E5 Low Level Setpoint G3,E6 (Assignment) Setpoint G3,E6 High Level Setpoint G3,E6 Low Level Setpoint G3,E7 (Assignment) Setpoint G3,E7 High Level

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 26 of 38

Setpoint G3,E7 Low Level Setpoint G3,E8 (Assignment) Setpoint G3,E8 High Level Setpoint G3,E8 Low Level Setpoint Group 4 Setpoint Group 4 Delay Setpoint G4,E1 (Assignment) Setpoint G4,E1 High Level Setpoint G4,E1 Low Level Setpoint G4,E2 (Assignment) Setpoint G4,E2 High Level Setpoint G4,E2 Low Level Setpoint G4,E3 (Assignment) Setpoint G4,E3 High Level Setpoint G4,E3 Low Level Setpoint G4,E4 (Assignment) Setpoint G4,E4 High Level Setpoint G4,E4 Low Level Setpoint G4,E5 (Assignment) Setpoint G4,E5 High Level Setpoint G4,E5 Low Level Setpoint G4,E6 (Assignment) Setpoint G4,E6 High Level Setpoint G4,E6 Low Level Setpoint G4,E7 (Assignment) Setpoint G4,E7 High Level Setpoint G4,E7 Low Level Setpoint G4,E8 (Assignment) Setpoint G4,E8 High Level Setpoint G4,E8 Low Level Tariff Settings The following sections detail the menus and tabulate the settings within each menu.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 27 of 38

Rate Switching Events 1-12 Event 1 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 2 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 3 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 4 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 5 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 6 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 7 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 28 of 38

Event 8 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 9 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 10 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 11 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 12 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 29 of 38

Rate Switching Events 13-24 Event 13 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 14 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 15 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 16 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 17 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 18 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 19 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 30 of 38

Event 20 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 21 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 22 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 23 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 24 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 31 of 38

Rate Switching Events 25-36 Event 25 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 26 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 27 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 28 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 29 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 30 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 31 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 32 of 38

Event 32 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 33 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 34 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 35 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 36 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 33 of 38

Rate Switching Events 37-48 Event 37 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 38 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 39 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 40 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 41 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 42 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 43 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 34 of 38

Event 44 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 45 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 46 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 47 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Event 48 Activation Day Activation Hour Activation Minute Active Rates Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8 Reg 1 Reg 5 Reg 2 Reg 6 Reg 3 Reg 7 Reg 4 Reg 8

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 35 of 38

Season Switching Events Event 1 Month Day of Month New Season Event 2 Month Day of Month New Season Event 3 Month Day of Month New Season Event 4 Month Day of Month New Season Event 5 Month Day of Month New Season Event 6 Month Day of Month New Season Event 7 Month Day of Month New Season Event 8 Month Day of Month New Season Event 9 Month Day of Month New Season Event 10 Month Day of Month New Season Event 11 Month Day of Month New Season Event 12 Month Day of Month New Season

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 36 of 38

Switching Events in Season Season 1 Season 2 Season 3 Season 4 Season 5 Season 6 Season 7 Season 8 Season 9 Season 10 Season 11 Season 12 Fixed Day Exclusions EXCLUSION 1 Week Day Season To Use Day to Use EXCLUSION 2 Week Day Season To Use Day to Use EXCLUSION 3 Week Day Season To Use Day to Use EXCLUSION 4 Week Day Season To Use Day to Use EXCLUSION 5 Week Day Season To Use Day to Use

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 37 of 38 Week Day Season To Use Day to Use

EXCLUSION 6

EXCLUSION 7

Week Day Season To Use Day to Use

EXCLUSION 8

Week Day Season To Use Day to Use

Fixed Date Exclusions EXCLUSION 1 Month Day Of Month Season To Use Day to Use EXCLUSION 2 Month Day Of Month Season To Use Day to Use EXCLUSION 3 Month Day Of Month Season To Use Day to Use EXCLUSION 4 Month Day Of Month Season To Use Day to Use EXCLUSION 5 Month Day Of Month Season To Use Day to Use EXCLUSION 6 Month Day Of Month Season To Use Day to Use

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 3 Page 38 of 38 Month Day Of Month Season To Use Day to Use

EXCLUSION 7

EXCLUSION 8

Month Day Of Month Season To Use Day to Use

Rate Register Data Source Rate Register 1 Rate Register 2 Rate Register 3 Rate Register 4 Rate Register 5 Rate Register 6 Rate Register 7 Rate Register 8

M301, M302 System Analysis and Measurement Centre Service Manual

Chapter 4 Problem Analysis

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 4 Contents 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2

1. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10

GENERAL FAULT FINDING Auxiliary power System measurand inputs Communications Analogue outputs (when fitted) Output relays Opto inputs DC input Password lost or not accepted Sub assembly fault finding Recommended spares

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 4 Page 1 of 2

Section 1.
1.1

GENERAL FAULT FINDING

Auxiliary power The unit needs to have an adequate voltage applied to the auxiliary supply terminals to operate. Check the rating label for the auxiliary supply voltage range (this can be one of two ranges 24 to 70V dc only or 70 to 230V dc or ac volts) for the unit. Using an appropriate voltmeter measure the voltage applied to the unit and check that it is within the specified range.

1.2

System measurand inputs The unit is synchronised to the voltage present on the A phase by a phase locked loop circuit. Should this voltage not be present then the unit will be placed out of service and the out of service LED will be lit on the M301. Using an appropriate voltmeter, measure the voltage present at the voltage input terminals and check it is within the range specified for normal operation of the unit. Using a phase rotation indicator check that the voltages have been applied to the unit in the correct phase sequence. Taking great care that the current transformer secondary is shorted, insert an appropriately rated ammeter into the current input circuits. After removing the short circuit, check that the current flowing into the unit is within the specified range. The same degree of care should be exercised when the ammeter is removed ensure the secondary of the current transformer is shorted whilst the ammeter is removed. If the measurements made are all within the normal operating values of the unit and the measured power does not correspond with the values measured then the polarity of the current transformers may be reversed. Carefully check the wiring of the transformers to the unit. It would be helpful to short each of the current transformer inputs in turn and note the resulting real power measurement before contacting the factory or local representative for advice.

1.3

Communications Check that other units on the communications bus are responding to the master station. If some units are responding then, by deduction, the break in the bus can be determined. If there is no response from any of the units then reset the communication port driving the bus with requests. Check that there are not two units with the same address on the bus. For Courier protocol systems the address cannot be allocated automatically unless the address is first manually set to 0. Also check if the unit address has been set to 255. This is the global address for which no replies are permitted. Check that the communication settings match those of the other units on the bus. If the unit is an M302 and is not responding then the unit can be reset to the default communication settings by pressing the reset button located beneath the labelled grommet.

1.4

Analogue outputs (when fitted) Check that the model has this option fitted via the user interface. The analogue output terminals can be safely disconnected. Having done so, connect a milliameter directly across the terminals and check that there is current

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 4 Page 2 of 2

flowing. If so, check the continuity of the current loop connected to the unit. This can be done by using either a continuity device or by feeding a current into the circuit from a dc constant current source. If there is continuity, then reconnect the current loop to the unit and measure the voltage at the terminals using an appropriate voltmeter. If the voltage exceeds 10V then the current loop has too much resistance around it. 1.5 Output relays (when fitted) Check that the model has this option fitted via the user interface. Check that the voltage across the relay contacts falls to zero when the relay operates. 1.6 Opto inputs (when fitted) Check that the unit has this option fitted via the user interface. Check for presence of a voltage at the terminals of the status inputs with an appropriately rated voltmeter. 1.7 DC input (when fitted) Check that the unit has this option fitted via the user interface. Check for the presence of the correct signal at the terminals using an appropriately rated multimeter. 1.8 Password lost or not accepted The Measurement Centre is supplied with the password set to AAAA. Only upper case letters are acceptable. The password can be changed by the user. See Chapter 1. There is an additional unique recovery password associated with the unit which can be supplied by the factory, or service agent, if they are given details of the unit serial number. The serial number will be found in the system data column of the menu and should correspond to the number on the label located on the rear of the unit. If they differ, quote the one in the system data column. 1.9 Sub assembly fault finding If the unit continues to operate incorrectly having completed the above tests then it will have to be returned to the factory for fault finding and repair. It is not practical to repair the unit on site. If any PCBs are replaced the unit will need to be recalibrated with equipment having a traceable accuracy of better than 0.05% of reading. This level of equipment specification is not available for site working. 1.10 Recommended spares A complete unit can be used to back up several Measurement Centres. In the very unlikely event that one unit fails it can then be replaced with a complete new unit and the faulty unit returned to the factory for repair. This will then become the new spare unit once repaired.

M301, M302 System Analysis and Measurement Centre Service Manual

Chapter 5 SCADA Information

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Contents 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 9 12 13 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 15 15 15 15 15 15 16

1. 1.1 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.1.1 1.2.1.2 1.2.1.3 1.2.1.4 1.2.1.5 1.2.1.6 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.4 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.4.4 1.4.5 1.5 1.5.1 1.5.1.1 1.5.1.2 1.5.1.3 1.5.1.4 1.5.1.5 1.5.1.6 1.6 1.6.1 1.6.2 1.6.3 1.6.4 1.6.5 1.6.6 1.6.7 1.6.8 1.6.9 1.6.10 1.6.11 1.6.12 1.6.13 1.6.14 1.6.14.1 1.6.14.2 1.7 1.7.1

FRONT PANEL USER AND REMOTE ACCESS INTERFACES Introduction Menu presentation Overview Layer 0 - default position Layer 1 - primary column headings Layer 2 - secondary column headings Layer 2 - data Layer 3 - data Multi-layer - scan alarms Menu navigation Scan alarms General menu navigation for setting change Procedure for changing settings Start point Password protection Setting change Group settings Immediate settings Menu contents Alarm scan menu 'Out of service' messages 'Setpoint' messages 'Trip' messages 'Alarm' scan messages Default display Primary column headings System data menu Language Password Description Plant reference Model number Serial number Communication level Courier address Software Ref 1 Software Ref 2 Opto input status (where fitted) Relay output status (where fitted) Active access level Password control Level 1 password Level 2 password System configuration menu Fitted hardware

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Contents 16 16 16 16 16 16 17 17 18 18 18 18 18 18 19 20 21 21 22 23 23 23 24 25 25 25 25 26 26 26 28 29 29 29 29 29 29 30 30 30 30 31 31 31 31 32 32

1.7.2 1.7.3 1.7.4 1.7.5 1.7.6 1.7.7 1.8 1.8.1 1.8.2 1.8.3 1.8.4 1.8.5 1.8.6 1.9 1.9.1 1.9.2 1.9.3 1.9.4 1.9.5 1.9.6 1.9.7 1.9.8 1.10 1.10.1 1.10.2 1.10.3 1.10.4 1.10.5 1.10.6 1.10.7 1.10.8 1.10.9 1.10.10 1.10.11 1.11 1.11.1 1.11.2 1.11.3 1.11.4 1.11.5 1.11.5.1 1.11.5.2 1.11.6 1.11.7 1.11.8 1.11.9 1.11.10

Communications protocol Display mode LCD backlight (where applicable) Real time clock Clock synchronisation Maximum clock synchronisation interval System modes menu Connection mode Power flow mode CT primary CT secondary VT primary VT secondary System commands menu Demand values secondary column headings Demands for previous period menu Maximum demands since last reset menu Maximum demands for present day menu Maximum demands for day 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7 Tariff metering registers Tariff settings status Active rate registers View records menu Disturbance recorder Recorder status Data source Samples per cycle Record configuration Post trigger cycle Setpoint triggers Opto input triggers (where fitted) Records stored Trigger disturbance recorder Reset waveform capture and disturbance records Communications settings menu Modem control lines Modbus address Modbus baud rate Modbus framing Courier address IEC870 baud rate IEC870 framing Demand calculation Function Demand subperiods (sliding window only) Demand period (sliding window) Demand period (fixed window or thermal characteristic)

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Contents 32 33 34 34 34 34 34 35 35 35 35 35 36 36 36 37 37 37 37 37 37 38 38 38 39 40 40 40 40 40 41 41 41 41 41 41 42 42 42 42 42 43 43 43 43 43 43

1.12 1.12.1 1.12.2 1.12.3 1.12.4 1.12.5 1.12.6 1.13 1.13.1 1.13.2 1.13.3 1.13.4 1.14 1.14.1 1.14.2 1.14.3 1.14.4 1.14.5 1.14.6 1.14.7 1.15 1.15.1 1.15.2 1.15.3 1.16 1.16.1 1.16.2 1.16.3 1.16.5 1.17 1.17.1 1.17.2 1.17.3 1.18 1.18.1 1.18.2 1.18.3 1.18.4 1.18.5 1.18.6 1.19 1.19.1 1.19.2 1.19.3 1.19.4 1.19.5 1.19.6

Analog outputs menu (where fitted) Analog output 1 measurand Analog output 1 full scale Analog output 1 slope Analog output 1 X-breakpoint Analog output 1 Y-breakpoint Analog output 1 span Setpoint group 1, 2, 3, and 4 menus Setpoint group 1 delay Setpoint group 1 element 1 Setpoint group 1 element 1 high level Setpoint group 1 element 1 low level Relay outputs menu Relay 1 assignment Relay X label Relay contacts Import kWh pulse duration Import kWh pulse rate Import kWh full scale Export kWh, export kVArh, and import kVArh Opto inputs menu (where fitted) Opto input X Opto input X label Tariff settings secondary column headings Rate switching events menus Activation day Activation hour Activation minute Rates Season switching event menu Month Day of month New season Switching events in season menu Switching events in season Fixed day exclusions Week cell Day cell Season to use cell Day to use cell Fixed date exclusions menu Month cell Day of month cell Season to use cell Day to use cell Rate register source Rate register data source cell

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Contents 44 81 81 81 81 81 81 81 82 82 82 82 83 83 83 83 83 83 83 83 83 83 83 83 84 84 84 84 84 85 87 93

2 3 3.1 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.3.1 3.2.3.2 3.3 3.3.1 3.4 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5 3.5.6 3.5.7 3.5.8 3.5.9 3.5.10 3.6 3.6.1 3.6.2 3.7 3.8 3.8.1 3.8.2 3.9 3.10

COURIER DATABASE MAP MODBUS SCADA INFORMATION Modbus protocol Transactions Request Response Request-response cycle example Request frame Response frame Framing RTU framing Supported functions and usage Register map Code Address Contents Data type Indicator Values Conditional Register type Min., max., step Passcode Error responses Request message Exception response message Exception codes Event and disturbance record extraction procedures Event record extraction Disturbance record extraction Modbus data types Modbus database map

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 1 of 160

Section 1.
1.1

FRONT PANEL USER AND REMOTE ACCESS INTERFACES

Introduction The M301 has two principle means of allowing the user to interact with it; the front panel interface and a remote communications access interface. This manual specifies the data available to the user and the method by which the user can interact with the database via the front panel interface. Also contained within the document are the associated text strings that appear at the Courier remote communications interface. The ModBus remote communications interface is more basic and is described in the SCADA section. These systems implement a broad range of standard facilities which allow the user to: View measurements View and change settings View (and reset where appropriate) alarm records View (and reset where appropriate) event records View (and reset where appropriate) alarm/error messages Access to the units database is provided by means of an intuitive menu system. Human interaction is provided by means of a twenty character by two line LCD, seven button keypad, and four LEDs. The user interface provides textual information in one of four languages: English French German Spanish

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 2 of 160

1.2 1.2.1

Menu presentation Overview The menu is organised in a tree-like structure, made up of columns and rows which have a hierarchical structure of layers. The menu structure is outlined below.

Layer 0

Default

Layer 1

Column Heading 1

Column Heading 2

Column Heading 3

Data 1.1

Data 1.2

Data 1.3

Data 3.1

Data 3.2

Data 3.3

Layer 2

Column Heading 2.1

Column Heading 2.2

Data 2.2.1

Data 2.2.2

Data 2.2.3

Layer 3
Data 2.1.1 Data 2.1.2 Data 2.1.3

Multi-level

Scan Alarms

Figure 1.

Menu Structure

The organisation of the layers is as follows: Layer 0 Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Multi-Layer Default position. Primary column headings. Data associated with primary column headings, or secondary column headings. Data associated with secondary column headings Scan alarms

1.2.1.1 Layer 0 - default position The default position, at the head of the menu structure, allows the user to browse through all available measurements. The units display reverts to the default position in the structure if there is no keypad activity for a pre-set time.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 3 of 160

1.2.1.2 Layer 1 - primary column headings The primary column headings logically break down the database into major areas of common functionality such as: System data Communications Configuration Analog Outputs, etc. 1.2.1.3 Layer 2 - secondary column headings Secondary column headings sub-divide some primary column headings into further logical areas of commonality. 1.2.1.4 Layer 2 - data Layer two data is associated with primary column heading. Data includes setting variables, fixed values or measured values. Password protection is employed on the data. 1.2.1.5 Layer 3 - data Layer three data is associated with secondary column headings. Data includes setting variables, fixed values or measured values. Password protection is employed. 1.2.1.6 Multi-layer - scan alarms The scan alarms section is multi-layer; it is directly accessible from any other layer. Scan alarms allows the user to view (and reset where alarms have cleared) setpoint, relay trip, out of service and alarm alarms. 1.3 Menu navigation Basic menu navigation is described in Chapter 1 of both Volumes 1 and 2 of this manual. 1.3.1 Scan alarms The alarm scan mode is available whenever an alarm LED is illuminated. In this situation the [READ] key can be used to scan through the alarm messages, which can then be reset if so desired. The [READ] key can be used to enter scan mode. If no alarm messages are present then an intermediate screen will be displayed, otherwise the first alarm message will be displayed. If one or more alarm messages are present then the [READ] key allows the user to step through the available messages, each press of the key selecting the next message. After the last alarm message has been displayed the user will be prompted by the message CLEAR to clear alarms . If the [READ] key is pressed whilst this message is present, the display scrolls back to the first alarm message. When viewing the message the [CLEAR] key can be pressed to clear the alarm messages. If the [CLEAR] key is pressed and none of the alarms are still active, the display returns to the previous menu layer via a temporary intermediate display noting this fact. However, if there are alarms that are still active the Alarms still active message is temporarily displayed before returning to the first remaining alarm message. The [READ] key can then be pressed to scan through the standing alarms again.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 4 of 160

Pressing the down arrow key at any time returns the user to the display that they left prior to entering the scan alarms menu. If an alarm clears itself whilst it is being viewed by the user the alarm message will be removed and the next alarm message displayed. If this happens when there are no other alarm messages present, the display returns to that which it left on entry to the Scan Alarms menu via a temporary intermediate display indicating that there are no more alarms present. Key [READ] [CLEAR] Down arrow Other arrow keys Description of Function Steps through present alarm messages and the reset alarms message in a cyclic manner. Resets/clears the alarm messages at the CLEAR to Clear Alarms prompt. Returns the user to the display that they were in before entering the scan alarms layer. No effect whilst in the scan alarms layer.

Summary of the key functionality whilst in the scan alarm mode.


1.3.2 General menu navigation for setting change The user locates the data they wish to change as described in the introduction. The data can then be selected by means of the [ENTER] key. This causes the menu to enter setting mode. A flashing character, associated with the data, indicates that data may be changed. If the data chosen is fixed and the [ENTER] key is pressed the message Not a setting will temporarily be displayed. If a remote setting is in progress and the [ENTER] key is pressed the message Remote setting in progress will temporarily be displayed and the user returned to normal browsing mode. Access to data is subject to password protection, so the process of changing data automatically invokes prompting for the correct level of password, unless the password protection has already been removed. Password protection, once removed, remains active until the menu returns to the default display, due to either the user returning the menu to the default display, or time-out of the keypad inactivity timer.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 5 of 160

Key Up arrow

Description of Function Increases the value of variable data in stepsize increments up to the maximum value or step up through available options in a cyclic manner. Decrease the value of variable data in stepsize increments down to the minimum value or step down through available options in a cyclic manner. This only has effect when there is more than one field in the variable data (eg. password or plant reference). It is used to move to the next field to the right in a cyclic manner. This only has effect when there is more than one field in the variable data (eg. password or plant reference). It is used to move to the next field to the left in a cyclic manner. This is used to select variable data when the value is to be changed (ie. enter setting mode) and to accept the value after the value has been changed. It has no effect with column headings or fixed data. This key is used to reset variable data to its original value and to exit the setting mode. The item of data that was to be changed then appears in the browse menu as its original value. Used to go to the scan alarms layer if any data is present, otherwise no effect.

Down arrow

Right arrow

Left Arrow

[ENTER]

[CLEAR]

[READ]

Summary of the functionality of keys for setting change.


1.4 1.4.1 Procedure for changing settings The following section details the procedure for setting changes. Start point It is assumed that the general menu navigation has been followed to display the item to be modified and, for example the following is displayed.
Language: English

Pressing the [ENTER] key initiates the password prompt. If no password is required or the password for the required level of protection has already been entered this stage is be omitted. 1.4.2 Password protection The password protection is described in the introduction. The procedure outlined in that section should be followed to allow the correct password access to be set.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 6 of 160

1.4.3

Setting change
Language: English

Again the leading character flashes between its present value and an underscore to prompt the user that the field may be changed. The numeric value or text string will be varied by means of the Up and Down arrow keys. (If more than one field is present eg. register bits, selection of the individual fields is provided by means of the left and right arrow keys. Pressing the [ENTER] key accepts the change and the menu returns to normal browsing mode but the new data value is displayed. Pressing the [CLEAR] key at any point aborts the setting change and the menu shall return to browsing mode via a temporary intermediate screen that states Setting Aborted. Time-out of the keypad inactivity timer aborts the whole process and the menu returns to the default position. 1.4.4 Group settings If the setting cell is a member of a group setting, the setting change is not implemented until the user moves up to a primary column heading. This is because the user may wish to change several related settings that should be implemented together. Time-out of the keypad inactivity timer, at any stage of this process, causes all the amended settings within that group to revert to their original values prior to the change. After making all the required group setting changes the user returns up the column headings by pressing the Up arrow key. If any of the group settings have changed the user shall be prompted by the following display. If no settings were actually changed the prompt is bypassed.
Update Settings? ENTER=Yes CLEAR=No

Pressing the [DOWN] key returns the user to the first data cell of the column heading, with any previous changes still visible. Pressing the [ENTER] key implements the settings and the menu moves to the column heading via an intermediate message. Pressing the [CLEAR] key discards the group settings change and the menu moves up to the column heading via a temporary intermediate message. 1.4.5 Immediate settings If an immediate setting has been altered and the [ENTER] key pressed the setting is updated immediately. Pressing the [ENTER] key implements the setting change immediately and returns the menu to normal browse mode. 1.5 Menu Contents The following sections depict the format of data that is displayed at the front panel and remote access point in order to view the data base of the unit.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 7 of 160

1.5.1

Alarm scan menu The alarm scan menu shall be available when one of the four red LEDs is illuminated. The four groups of event messages shall be: Out of service Setpoint Trip Alarm The following subsections give examples of the types of alarm messages that may be displayed in alarm scan mode.

1.5.1.1 Out of service messages An 'out of service' message indicates that the unit is in a configurable or calibration mode. The following 'out of service' alarm messages may be displayed.
Front Panel Configuration Settings Invalid Calibration Settings Invalid Configuration Mode Entered Calibration Mode Entered Frequency Tracking Failed Frequency tracking failed Calibration mode entered Configuration mode entered Calibration settings invalid Remote Access Configuration settings invalid

1.5.1.2 Setpoint messages The setpoint LED will illuminate when an alarm setpoint is exceeded. When a setpoint is exceeded the alarm scan menu displays the setpoint group, alarm element, alarm measurand, greater/less than sign, and the pre-set trip level. Typical measurand strings are shown below.
G1,E1: Frequency > 100.0 % G1,E2: Pt < 100.0 % G1,E1: n > 100.0 % G1,E1: Frequency > 100.0 % G1,E2: Pt > 100.0 % G1,E1: n > 100.0 %

1.5.1.3 Trip messages The trip LED will illuminate on when an alarm relay operates. In the case of a relay operating, the data is displayed in the alarm scan menu as shown below.
Relay O/P Operated: Label Relay O/P Operated: Label

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 8 of 160

1.5.1.4 Alarm scan messages This LED illuminates for exceptional errors. The unit displays the following alarm messages to the user.
Front Panel Watchdog Time-Out Test Failed Comms Channel A Test 1 Failed Comms Channel A Test 2 Failed Comms Channel B Test 1 Failed Comms Channel B Test 2 Failed EEPROM Error Immediate Settings EEPROM Error System Mode Setting EEPROM Error Dist Rec Settings EEPROM Error Comms Settings EEPROM Error Demand Settings EEPROM Error Analog O/P Settings EEPROM Error Relay O/P Settings EEPROM Error Opto I/P Settings EEPROM Error Alarm Gp 1 Settings EEPROM Error Alarm Gp 2 Settings EEPROM Error Alarm Gp 3 Settings EEPROM Error Alarm Gp 4 Settings EEPROM Error Tariff Settings EEPROM Error Metering Data EEPROM Error Event Records EEPROM Error - Event Records EEPROM Error - Metering Data EEPROM Error - Dist Rec Settings EEPROM Error - Comms Settings EEPROM Error - Demand Settings EEPROM Error - Analog O/P Settings EEPROM Error - Relay O/P Settings EEPROM Error - Opto I/P Settings EEPROM Error - Alarm Gp 1 Settings EEPROM Error - Alarm Gp 2 Settings EEPROM Error - Alarm Gp 3 Settings EEPROM Error - Alarm Gp 4 Settings EEPROM Error - System Mode Setting EEPROM Error - Immediate Settings Comms Channel B Test 2 Failed Comms Channel B Test 1 Failed Comms Channel A Test 2 Failed Comms Channel A Test 1 Failed Remote Access Watchdog Time-Out Test Failed

EEPROM Error - Tariff Settings

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 9 of 160

EEPROM Error LED Status EEPROM Error Clock Invalid EEPROM Error Clock Inaccurate EEPROM Error Ana O/P Serial Port

EEPROM Error - LED Status

EEPROM Error - Clock Invalid

EEPROM Error - Clock Inaccurate

EEPROM Error - Analog O/P Serial Port

1.5.1.5 Default display The default display allows the user to scroll through the units measurements such as voltage, current, power, and maximum demand values, etc. Data always appears in the same slot and the slot is blank if the connection mode renders the data unavailable.
Front Panel Remote Access MEASUREMENTS Van=0.000 Vbn=0.000 Vcn=0.000 kV Vbn=0.000 kV Vcn=0.000 kV Vab=0.000 Vbc=0.000 Vca=0.000 kV Vbc=0.000 kV Vca=0.000 kV Van=0.000 Vbn=0.000 Vcn=0.000 %THD Vbn(THD)=0.000 % Vcn(THD)=0.000 % Vab=0.000 Vbc=0.000 Vca=0.000 %THD Vbc(THD)=0.000 % Vca(THD)=0.000 % Volts NPS=0.000 % Volts NPS=0.000 % Vab(THD)=0.000 % Van(THD)=0.000 % Vab=0.000 kV Van=0.000 kV

a=0.000 b=0.000 c=0.000 kA

a=0.000 kA b=0.000 kA c=0.000 kA

Neutral Current= 0.000 A

Neutral Current=0.000 A

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 10 of 160

a=0.000 b=0.000 c=0.000 %THD

a(THD)=0.000 % b(THD)=0.000 % c(THD)=0.000 %

Amps NPS=0.000 %

Amps NPS=0.000 %

a=0.000 b=0.000 c=0.000 MD kA

a(MD)=0.000 kA b(MD)=0.000 kA c(MD)=0.000 kA


Real Power:

Real Power: Ph A=00.00000 kW Real Power: Ph B=-00.00000 kW Real Power: Ph C=00.00000 kW Real Power: Total=00.00000 kW

Phase A=00.00000 kW

Phase B=-00.00000 kW

Phase C=00.00000 kW

Total=00.00000 kW

Reactive Power: Reactive Power: Ph A=00.00000 kVAr Reactive Power: Ph B=-00.00000 kVAr Reactive Power: Ph C=00.00000 kVAr Reactive Power: Total=-00.00000 kVAr Apparent Power: Apparent Power: Ph A=00.00000 kVA Apparent Power: Ph B=00.00000 kVA Apparent Power: Ph C=00.00000 kVA Apparent Power: Total=00.00000 kVA PF=0.000 PF: 0.000 Total=00.00000 kVA Phase C=00.00000 kVA Phase B=00.00000 kVA Phase A=00.00000 kVA Total=-00.00000 kVAr Phase C=00.00000 kVAr Phase B=-00.00000 kVAr Phase A=00.00000 kVAr

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 11 of 160

Import Energy= 000000.000 kWh Export Energy= 000000.000 kWh Import Energy= 000000.000 kVArh Export Energy= 000000.000 kVArh MD Import= 00.00000 kW MD Export= 00.00000 kW MD (+)=00.00000 kVA

Import Energy=000000.000 kWh

Export Energy=000000.000 kWh

Import Energy=000000.000 kVArh

Export Energy=000000.000 kVArh

MD Import=00.00000 kW

MD Export=00.00000 kW

MD (+)=00.00000 kVA

MD (-)=00.00000 kVA

MD (-)=00.00000 kVA

MD Lagging= 00.00000 kVAr MD Leading= 00.0000 kVAr MD PF=0.000

MD Lagging=00.00000 kVAr

MD Leading=00.00000 kVAr

MD PF=0.000

System Frequency= 00.000 Hz DC Input=0.000 %

System Frequency=00.000 Hz

DC Input=0.000 %

Pulsed Input 1= 0000000000 Pulsed Input 2= 0000000000 Time Into Period: 18 Into 30 min

Pulsed Input 1=0000000000

Pulsed Input 2=0000000000

Time Into Demand Period: 18 Into 30 min

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 12 of 160

1.5.1.6 Primary column headings The Primary Column headings break down the data base into major areas of common functionality.
Front Panel SYSTEM DATA Remote Access SYSTEM DATA

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

SYSTEM MODES

SYSTEM MODES

SYSTEM COMMANDS

SYSTEM COMMANDS

DEMAND VALUES

DEMAND VALUES

TARIFF METER

TARIFF METER

VIEW RECORDS

VIEW RECORDS

DISTURBANCE RECORDER

DISTURBANCE RECORDER

COMMUNICATIONS SETTINGS

COMMUNICATIONS SETTINGS

DEMAND CALCULATION

DEMAND CALCULATION

ANALOG OUTPUTS

ANALOG OUTPUTS

RELAY OUTPUTS

RELAY OUTPUTS

OPTO INPUTS

OPTO INPUTS

SETPOINT GROUP 1

SETPOINT GROUP 1

SETPOINT GROUP 2

SETPOINT GROUP 2

SETPOINT GROUP 3

SETPOINT GROUP 3

SETPOINT GROUP 4

SETPOINT GROUP 4

TARIFF SETTINGS

TARIFF SETTINGS

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 13 of 160

1.6

System data menu


Front Panel SYSTEM DATA Language: English Password: **** Password: **** Remote Access SYSTEM DATA Language: English

Description: Measment Centre Plant Reference:

Description: Measurement Centre

Plant Reference: <User defined>

<User defined>
Model Number: M300H1042P0000A Serial Number: 123456A Communication Level: 1 Courier Address: 1 Software Ref 1: Software Ref 1: <To be defined> Serial Number: 123456A Model Number: M300H1042P0000A

<To be defined>
Software Ref 2: Software Ref 2: <To be defined >

<To be defined>
Opto I/P Status: 01 Opto Input Status

Opto 1: 1 Opto 2: 0

Relay O/P Status: 1010

Relay Output Status

Relay 1: 0 Relay 2: 1 Relay 3: 0 Relay 4: 1 Active Access Level: 0 Password Control: 0 Level 1 Password: **** Level 2 Password: **** Level 2 Password: **** Level 1 Password: **** Password Control: 0 Active Access Level: 0

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 14 of 160

1.6.1

Language This setting cell allows the user to select the required interface language. The table below shows the possible states of the language cell.
Front Panel Remote Access

Language: ENGLISH Language: FRANCAIS Language: DEUTSCH Language: ESPANOL

Language: ENGLISH

Language: FRANCAIS

Language: DEUTSCH

Language: ESPANOL

1.6.2

Password This setting cell allows the user to enter the password for the desired security level. The password shall be entered as described in the introduction to the two volumes.

1.6.3

Description This data cell is a data cell containing a character string describing the device, namely Measurement Centre.

1.6.4

Plant reference A setting cell containing a 16 character string. Its principal application is to identify the location of the unit when viewed over a remote access system.

1.6.5 1.6.6 1.6.7

Model number A data cell containing the units model number. Serial number This data cell identifies the serial number of the unit. Communication level This data cell indicates the capability of the communications interface to a remote system. The measurement centre implements level 1 Courier Communications.

1.6.8 1.6.9 1.6.10 1.6.11

Courier address This setting cell contains the address of the unit. Software Ref 1 This data cell contains the version of the boot loader software. Software Ref 2 This data cell contains the version of the main software. Opto input status (where fitted) This data cell enables the user to view the status of the opto inputs. When an input is energised its flag is shown as a 1, otherwise as a 0. Opto 1 status is defined in bit 1 and Opto 2 is in bit 2.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 15 of 160

1.6.12

Relay output status (where fitted) This data cell enables the user to view the status of the relay outputs. When an output is energised its flag is shown as a 1, otherwise as a 0. Output states shall be 1-4 from left to right.

1.6.13

Active access level This data cell indicates the currently active password level. The value will be displayed as an integer of range 0 to 3.

1.6.14

Password control This setting cell indicates the lowest (default) level of access that is available without entering a password. The value will be displayed as an integer of range 0 to 2.

1.6.15

Level 1 password This setting cell allows the password for level 1 to be changed. The password is four upper case characters from A to Z and only visible as they are entered.

1.6.16

Level 2 password This setting cell allows the password for level 2 to be changed. The password will be four upper case characters from A to Z and only visible as they are entered.

1.7

System configuration menu


Front Panel SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Remote Access SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

Fitted Hardware: 0 No Options Fitted Comms Protocol: Cou/IEC870 Mod/RS485 Display Mode: Primary LCD Backlight: ON Real Time Clock: 16-Mar-1997 10:34:50 Clock Synch: Disabled Max Clock Synch Interval: Disabled

Fitted Hardware: No Options Fitted

Comms Protocol: Cou/IEC870 Mod/RS485

Display Mode: Primary

LCD Backlight: ON

Real Time Clock: 16/Mar/1997 10:34:50

Clock Synch: Disabled

Max Clock Synch Interval: Disabled

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 16 of 160

1.7.1

Fitted hardware This data cell will indicate to the user the fitted hardware option as follows:
Front panel Remote access

Fitted Hardware: 0 No Options Fitted Fitted Hardware: 1 Rly, Opto Fitted Hardware: 2 Ana, DC Fitted Hardware: 3 Rly, Opto, Ana, DC

Fitted Hardware: 0 - No Options Fitted

Fitted Hardware: 1 - Rly, Opto

Fitted Hardware: 2 - Ana, DC

Fitted Hardware: 3 - Rly, Opto, Ana, DC

1.7.2

Communications protocol This setting cell enables the user to choose the desired communications protocol. The possible states of the cell are:
Front Panel Comms Protocol: Cou/IEC870 Mod/RS485 Comms Protocol: Cou/K-Bus Mod/RS232 Comms Protocol: Cou/K-Bus Mod/RS232 Remote Access Comms Protocol: Cou/IEC870 Mod/RS485

1.7.3

Display mode This setting cell will allow the user to select if they wish to display measurements in primary or secondary terms as follows:
Front Panel Display Mode: Primary Display Mode: Secondary Display Mode: Secondary Remote Access Display Mode: Primary

1.7.4

LCD backlight (where applicable) This setting cell allows the user to select if they wish the LCD backlight to be on or off. The options are ON or OFF.

1.7.5

Real time clock This setting cell displays the current value of the units real time clock. Each field of the cell is set in the standard manner.

1.7.6

Clock synchronisation This setting cell allows the user to select the clock synchronisation rate. The options are Disabled, 30s, 1 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 30 min, or 60 min.

1.7.7

Maximum clock synchronisation interval This setting cell is used to select the maximum clock synchronisation interval. The cell can be set to Disabled, 1 Day, 2 Days, 3 Days, ....... 31 Days.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 17 of 160

1.8

System modes menu


Front Panel Connection Mode: 0 1ph (L,N) Power Flow Mode: Mode 1 CT Primary: 9999A CT Secondary: 9.000A VT Primary: 999999V VT Secondary: 500.00V VT Secondary: 500.00V VT Primary: 999999V CT Secondary: 9.000A CT Primary: 9999A Power Flow Mode: Mode 1 Remote Access Connection Mode 0: 1ph (L,N)

1.8.1

Connection mode This setting cell will enable the user to select the desired connection mode.
Front Panel Connection Mode: 0 1ph (L,N) Connection Mode: 1 3ph4w bal(1VT,1CT) Connection Mode: 2 3ph3w bal(3VT,1CT) Connection Mode: 3 3ph3w unbal(3VT,2CT) Connection Mode: 4 3ph4w unbal(2VT,3CT) Connection Mode: 5 3ph4w unbal(3VT,3CT) Connection Mode: 6 2ph3w bal(2VT,2CT) Connection Mode: 7 3ph3w bal(2VT,2CT) Connection Mode: 7 - 3ph3w bal(2VT,2CT) Connection Mode: 6 - 2ph3w bal(2VT,2CT) Connection Mode: 5 - 3ph4w unbal(3VT,3CT) Connection Mode: 4 - 3ph4w unbal(2VT,3CT) Connection Mode: 3 - 3ph3w unbal(3VT,2CT) Connection Mode: 2 - 3ph3w bal(3VT,1CT) Connection Mode: 1 - 3ph4w bal(1VT,1CT) Remote Access Connection Mode: 0 - 1ph (L,N)

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 18 of 160

1.8.2

Power flow mode This setting cell allows the user to select one of four power flow modes.
Front Panel Power Flow Mode: Mode 1 Power Flow Mode: Mode 2 Power Flow Mode: Mode 3 Power Flow Mode: Mode 4 Power Flow Mode: Mode 4 Power Flow Mode: Mode 3 Power Flow Mode: Mode 2 Remote Access Power Flow Mode: Mode 1

1.8.3

CT Primary This setting cell allows the user to set the CT primary value. The cells contents are variable from 0-9999A in 1A steps.

1.8.4

CT Secondary This setting cell allows the user to set the CT secondary value. The cells contents are variable from 1.000-9.000A in 0.001A steps.

1.8.5

VT Primary This setting cell allows the user to set the VT primary value. The cells contents are variable from 0-999999V in 1V steps.

1.8.6

VT Secondary This setting cell enables the user to set the desired VT secondary value. The cells contents are variable from 1.00V to 500.00V in 0.01V steps.

1.9

System commands menu The System Commands menu is presented to the user as shown in the table. The menu basically allows the user to initiate various commands. Pressing the front panel button referred to in the quotation marks carries out the command (M301 only). Once the command has been completed a message is temporarily displayed to inform the user. All of these commands are accessed via the communications on an M302.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 19 of 160

Front Panel CLEAR to Reset Energy Meter CLEAR to Reset Demand CLEAR to Reset Energy & Demand CLEAR to Reset Pulse Counts

Remote Access Reset Energy Meter: No

Reset Demand: No

Reset Energy Meter and Demand: No

Reset Pulse Counts: No

Reset Local LEDs: No CLEAR to Restore Password Protection ENTER to Capture A ph Fast Wform Data ENTER to Capture B ph Fast Wform Data ENTER to Capture C ph Fast Wform Data Start Waveform Capture: No Restore Password Protection: No

1.9.1

Demand values secondary column headings The primary column heading, Demand Values is broken down further into secondary column headings as shown in the table. Throughout the demand columns the symbol shall indicate a link to the date and time stamp sub-cell. To gain access to this cell the Down arrow key key is pressed. After viewing, the main cell can be returned to by pressing the Up arrow key.
Front Panel DEMAND VALUES Remote Access DEMAND VALUES

DEMANDS FOR PREVIOUS PERIOD MAXIMUM DEMANDS SINCE LAST RESET MAXIMUM DEMANDS FOR PRESENT DAY MAXIMUM DEMANDS FOR DAY 1 MAXIMUM DEMANDS FOR DAY 2 MAXIMUM DEMANDS FOR DAY 3 MAXIMUM DEMANDS FOR DAY 4

DEMANDS FOR PREVIOUS PERIOD

MAXIMUM DEMANDS SINCE LAST RESET

MAXIMUM DEMANDS FOR PRESENT DAY

MAXIMUM DEMANDS FOR DAY 1

MAXIMUM DEMANDS FOR DAY 2

MAXIMUM DEMANDS FOR DAY 3

MAXIMUM DEMANDS FOR DAY 4

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 20 of 160

MAXIMUM DEMANDS FOR DAY 5 MAXIMUM DEMANDS FOR DAY 6 MAXIMUM DEMANDS FOR DAY 7

MAXIMUM DEMANDS FOR DAY 5

MAXIMUM DEMANDS FOR DAY 6

MAXIMUM DEMANDS FOR DAY 7

1.9.2

Demands for previous period menu These data cells contain the maximum demands for the previous period.
Front Panel DEMANDS FOR PREVIOUS PERIOD Prev Period Demand: Import=00.00000kW Prev Period Demand: Export=00.00000kW Prev Period Demand: Lag=00.00000kVAr Prev Period Demand: Lead=00.00000kVAr Prev Period Demand: (+)=00.00000kVA Prev Period Demand: (-)=00.00000kVA Prev Period Demand: PF=0.000 Prev Period Demand: PF=0.000 (-)=00.00000kVA (+)=00.0000 kVA Lead=00.00000kVAr Lag=00.00000kVAr Export=00.00000kW Import=00.00000kW Remote Access DEMANDS FOR PREVIOUS PERIOD

a=0.000A b=0.000A c=0.000A

a=0.000A
Prev Period Demand:

b=0.000A
Prev Period Demand:

c=0.000A

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 21 of 160

1.9.3

Maximum demands since last reset menu These data cells contain the maximum demand values, and access to their corresponding time stamp sub-cell, since the last reset.
Front Panel MAXIMUM DEMANDS SINCE LAST RESET MD Since Last Reset: Import=00.00000 kW MD Since Last Reset: Export=00.00000 kW MD Since Last Reset: Lag=00.00000 kVAr MD Since Last Reset: Lead=00.00000 kVAr MD Since Last Reset: (+)=00.00000 kVA MD Since Last Reset: (-)=00.00000 kVA MD Since Last Reset: PF=0.000 Import=00.00000 kW 06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087 Export=00.00000 kW 06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087 Lag=00.00000 kVAr 06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087 Lead=00.00000 kVAr 06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087 (+)=00.00000 kVA 06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087 (-)=00.00000 kVA 06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087 PF=0.000 06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087 Remote Access MAXIMUM DEMANDS SINCE LAST RESET

MD Since Last Reset:

a=0.000 A
06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087

a=0.000 kA b=0.000 kA c=0.000 kA

MD Since Last Reset:

b=0.000 A
06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087

MD Since Last Reset:

c=0.000 A
06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087

1.9.4

Maximum demands for present day menu These data cells contain the maximum demand values, and access to their corresponding time stamp sub-cell, for the present day.
Front Panel MAXIMUM DEMANDS FOR PRESENT DAY MD Present Day: Import=00.00000 kW MD Present Day: Export=00.00000 kW MD Present Day: Lag=00.00000 kVAr MD Present Day: Lead=00.00000 kVAr Import=00.00000 kW 06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087 Export=00.00000 kW 06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087 Lag=00.00000 kVAr 06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087 Lead=00.00000 kVAr 06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087 Remote Access MAXIMUM DEMANDS FOR PRESENT DAY

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 22 of 160

MD Present Day: (+)=00.00000 kVA MD Present Day: (-)=00.00000 kVA MD Present Day: PF=0.000

(+)=00.00000 kVA 06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087 (-)=00.00000 kVA 06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087 PF=0.000 06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087

MD Present Day:

a=0.000 A
06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087

a=0.000 A b=0.000 A c=0.000 A

MD Present Day:

b=0.000 A
06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087

MD Present Day:

c=0.000 A
06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087

1.9.5

Maximum Demands For Day 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 The maximum demand menu for days 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 can be accessed as follows. The Maximum Demands For Day 1 is used as an example. The data cells contain the maximum demand values, and access to their corresponding time stamp in the sub-cell, for day one.
Front Panel MAXIMUM DEMANDS FOR DAY 1 MD Day 1: Import=00.00000 kW MD Day 1: Export=00.00000 kW MD Day 1: Lag=00.00000 kVAr MD Day 1: Lead=00.00000 kVAr MD Day 1: (+)=00.00000 kVA MD Day 1: (-)=00.00000 kVA MD Day 1: PF=0.000 MD Day 1: Import=00.00000 kW 06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087 Export=00.00000 kW 06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087 Lag=00.00000 kVAr 06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087 Lead=00.00000 kVAr 06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087 (+)=00.00000 kVA 06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087 (-)=00.00000 kVA 06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087 PF=0.000 06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087 Remote Access MAXIMUM DEMANDS FOR DAY 1

a=0.000 A
06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087

a=0.000 A
MD Day 1:

b=0.000 A
06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087

b=0.000 A
MD Day 1:

c=0.000 A
06-Jan-1997 11:33:31.087

c=0.000 A

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 23 of 160

1.9.6

Tariff metering registers


Front Panel TARIFF METER Remote Access TARIFF METER

Settings Status: 1010

Tariff Settings Status: 1010

Active Rate Reg: 10100110

Active Rate Registers: 10100110

Rate Register 1: 123456789 kWh Rate Register 2: 987654321 kVArh Rate Register 3: 2345 kVArh Rate Register 8: 123456789 kWh

Rate Register 1: 123456789 kWh

Rate Register 2: 987654321 kVArh

Rate Register 3: 2345 kVArh

Rate Register 8: 123456789 kWh

1.9.7

Tariff settings status This data cell enables the user to see which of the Tariff Settings Status conflicts flags are currently active. When a conflict exists its flag is shown as a 1, otherwise as a0. The symbol indicates to the user that there are associated data sub-cell. Pressing the Down arrow key displays the first sub-cell. Pressing the Right arrow and Left arrow keys scrolls through the sub-cells shown in the Table. The Up arrow key can be pressed at any time to move the user back up from a sub-cell to the main data cell.
Dup Rate Events: 0 Dup Season Events: 1 Invalid Season: 1 Events In season: 1

1.9.8

Active rate registers This data cell enables the user to see which of the rate registers are currently active. When a register is active its flag is shown as a 1, otherwise as a0. The flags are listed in the order Register 8 to Register 1 from left to right. The symbol indicates to the user that there are associated data sub-cell. Pressing the Down arrow key displays the first sub-cell. Pressing the Left arrow and Right arrow keys scrolls through the sub-cells shown in the table. The Up arrow key may be pressed at any time to move the user back up from a sub-cell to the main data cell.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 24 of 160

Rate Register 1: 0 Rate Register 2: 1 Rate Register 8: 1

1.10

View records menu This menu displays the history of the Out Of Service, Alarm, and Setpoint Alarms. The first two cells displays the number of records available and gives the option to reset all records respectively. If there are no records present the menu displays the number of records as 0.
Front Panel VIEW RECORDS Remote Access VIEW RECORDS

Number of Records: 49 CLEAR to Clear Event Records 0:Frequency Tracking Failed 1:G1,E1 High Trip Van=0.000 kV 2:G2,E2 Low Trip MD Lead=00.00000kVAr 46:G3,E5 High Reset MD (+)=00.00000 kVA 47:G4,E1 Low Reset Total=00.00000 kVA 48:Relay O/P Status 0110 49:Opto I/P Status 01

Number of Records: 49

Clear all Records: No

0: Frequency Tracking Failed 17-Feb-1997 09:23:21 1: G1, E1 High Trip Van=0.000 kV 17-Feb-1997 09:23:21 2: G1,E1 Low Trip MD Lead=00.00000 kVAr 17-Feb-1997 09:23:21 46: G1,E1 High Reset MD (+)=00.00000 kV 17-Feb-1997 09:23:21 47: G1,E1 Low Reset Total=00.00000 kVA 17-Feb-1997 09:23:21 48: Relay O/P Status 0110 17-Feb-1997 09:23:21 49: Opto I/P Status 01 17-Feb-1997 09:23:21

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 25 of 160

1.10.1 Disturbance recorder


Front Panel DISTURBANCE RECORDER Remote Access DISTURBANCE RECORDER

Recorder Status: Stopped

Recorder Status: Stopped

Data Source: ADC Samples Samples Per Cycle: 48 Record Config: 1 Record, 36 Cycles Post Trigger Cycle: 36 Setpoint Triggers: Group 1, Element 1: 0 Group 1, Element 2: 1 Group 1, Element 3: 0 Group 1, Element 4: 1 Group 2, Element 1: 0 Group 4, Element 8: 1 Opto Input Trigger: 10 Opto I/P 1: 1 Opto I/P 2: 0 Records Stored: 0 ENTER to Trigger Disturbance Recorder CLEAR to Clear Wave Cap & Dist Rec Clear Waveform Capture & Disturbance Records: No Trigger Disturbance Recorder: No Records Stored: 0 Opto Input Triggers: Opto I/P 1 Setpoint Triggers: Post Trigger Cycle: 36 Record Configuration: 1 Record, 36 Cycles Samples Per Cycle: 48

1.10.2

Recorder status This data cell indicates the status of the recorder. The possible states of the cell are Stopped, Triggered or Running.

1.10.3

Data source This data cell indicates to the user that the source of disturbance record is the Analog to digital converter samples.

1.10.4

Samples per cycle This setting cell contains the number of samples per cycle to be taken by the disturbance recorder. It shall be set to 48 or 24.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 26 of 160

1.10.5

Record configuration This setting cell allows the user to select the number of records and cycles per record. The possible states of the cell are:
Front Panel Remote Access

Record Config: 1 Record, 36 Cycles Record Config: 2 Records, 18 Cycles Record Config: 3 Records, 12 Cycles Record Config: 4 Records, 9 Cycles Record Config: 1 Record, 72 Cycles Record Config: 2 Records, 36 Cycles Record Config: 3 Records, 24 Cycles Record Config: 4 Records, 18 Cycles

Record Config: 1 Record, 36 Cycles

Record Config: 2 Records, 18 Cycles

Record Config: 3 Records, 12 Cycles

Record Config: 4 Records, 9 Cycles

Record Config: 1 Records, 72 Cycles

Record Config: 2 Records, 36 Cycles

Record Config: 3 Records, 24 Cycles

Record Config: 4 Records, 18 Cycles

1.10.6

Post trigger cycle This setting cell allows the user to set the number of Post Trigger Cycles stored. The range limit is dependant on the state of the Record Configuration cell.

1.10.7

Setpoint triggers This data setting enables the user to view/set the desired Setpoint Element Triggers. The symbol indicates to the user that there are associated data subcells. Pressing the Down arrow key takes the user to the display shown by below. There are 32 flags representing Four Setpoint Groups each with eight Elements. The bottom row represents Group 1 Element 1 through Group 2 Element 8 respectively and the top row Group 3 Element 1 through Group 4 Element 8 respectively. When a trigger is activated its flag is shown as a 1, otherwise as a 0.
Group 4 Group 3

Bit 32 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 Bit 0 Group 2 Group 1 0 0

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 27 of 160

The and symbols indicate that pressing the Up arrow key returns the user to the main setting cell, whilst pressing the Down arrow key expands the first flag. The flags expanded information is displayed as in the table below. The and symbols indicate that the user can scroll left or right through the cells in a cyclic manner using the Left arrrow and Right arrow keys respectively.
Group 1,Element 1: 0 Group 1,Element 2: 0 Group 1,Element 3: 1 Group 1,Element 4: 0 Group 1,Element 5: 0 Group 1,Element 6: 0 Group 1,Element 7: 0 Group 1,Element 8: 0 Group 2,Element 1: 0 Group 2,Element 2: 0 Group 2,Element 3: 0 Group 2,Element 4: 0 Group 2,Element 5: 1 Group 2,Element 6: 0 Group 2,Element 7: 0 Group 2,Element 8: 0 Group 3,Element 1: 0 Group 3,Element 2: 0 Group 3,Element 3: 0

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 28 of 160

Group 3,Element 4: 1 Group 3,Element 5: 1 Group 3,Element 6: 0 Group 3,Element 7: 0 Group 3,Element 8: 0 Group 4,Element 1: 0 Group 4,Element 2: 1 Group 4,Element 3: 0 Group 4,Element 4: 0 Group 4,Element 5: 0 Group 4,Element 6:0 Group 4,Element 7:0 Group 4,Element 8:1

1.10.8

Opto input triggers (where fitted) This setting cell allows the user to set/view the Opto Input Trigger assignments. When an input is active its flag is shown as a 1, otherwise as a 0. Input states shall be 1-2 from left to right. The symbol shall indicate to the user that there are associated data sub-cell. Pressing the Down arrow key shall display the first sub-cell. Pressing the Left arrow and Right arrow keys shall then scroll through the sub-cells. The Up arrow key may be pressed at any time to move the user back up from a sub-cell to the main data cell.
Opto Input Trig 1:1 Opto Input Trig 2:0

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 29 of 160

1.10.9

Records stored This data cell shows the number of records stored.

1.10.10 Trigger disturbance recorder This command cell allows the user to trigger the disturbance recorder. 1.10.11 Reset waveform capture and disturbance records This command cell allows the user to reset waveform capture and all disturbance records. 1.11 Communications settings menu
Front Panel COMMUNICATIONS SETTINGS Modem Control Lines: Disabled Modbus Address: 1 Modbus Address: 1 Modem Control Lines: Disabled Remote Access COMMUNICATIONS SETTINGS

Modbus Baud Rate: 9600 Modbus Framing: 1St, 8Dt, Even Par, 2Stp Courier Address: 255 IEC870 Baud Rate: 9600 IEC870 Framing: FT1.2, 11 bits

Modbus Baud Rate: 9600

Modbus Framing: 1 Start Bit, 8 Data Bits, Even Parity Bit, 2 Stop Bits Courier Address: 255

IEC870 Baud Rate: 9600

IEC870 Framing: FT1.2, 11 bits

1.11.1

Modem control lines This setting cell allows the user to enable or disable the modem control lines. The possible cell states are Disabled, Enabled.

1.11.2

Modbus address This setting cell allows the user to set the modbus address between 1 and 247 in steps of one.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 30 of 160

1.11.3

Modbus baud rate This setting cell allows the user to select the desired modbus baud rate. The possible cell states are shown below.
Front Panel Modbus Baud Rate: 1200 Modbus Baud Rate: 2400 Modbus Baud Rate: 4800 Modbus Baud Rate: 9600 Modbus Baud Rate: 19200 Modbus Baud Rate: 19200 Modbus Baud Rate: 9600 Modbus Baud Rate: 4800 Modbus Baud Rate: 2400 Remote Access Modbus Baud Rate: 1200

1.11.4

Modbus framing This setting cell is used to select the desired modbus framing. The possible cell states are shown below.
Front Panel Modbus Framing: 1St, 8Dt, No Par, 2Stp Modbus Framing: 1St, 8 Dt, Even Par, 1Stp Modbus Framing: 1St, 8 Dt, Odd Par, 1Stp Remote Access Modbus Framing: 1 Start Bit, 8 Data Bits, No Parity Bit, 2 Stop Bits Modbus Framing: 1 Start Bit, 8 Data Bits, Even Parity Bit, 1 Stop Bit Modbus Framing: 1 Start Bit, 8 Data Bits, Odd Parity Bit, 1 Stop Bit

1.11.5

Courier address This setting cell allows the user to set the courier address. The cell can be set between 0 and 255 in steps of one.

1.11.6

IEC870 baud rate This setting cell allows the user to select the desired IEC870 baud rate. The possible cell states are shown below.
Front Panel IEC870 Baud Rate: 1200 IEC870 Baud Rate: 2400 IEC870 Baud Rate: 4800 IEC870 Baud Rate: 9600 IEC870 Baud Rate: 19200 IEC870 Baud Rate: 19200 IEC870 Baud Rate: 9600 IEC870 Baud Rate: 4800 IEC870 Baud Rate: 2400 Remote Access IEC870 Baud Rate: 1200

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 31 of 160

1.11.7

IEC870 Framing The user can use this setting cell to select the desired IEC870 framing. The possible cell states are shown below.
Front Panel IEC870 Framing: FT1.2, 11 Bits IEC870 Framing: 10 Bits IEC870 Framing: 10 Remote Access IEC870 Framing: FT1.2, 11 Bits

1.11.8

Demand calculation The demand calculation menu is presented to the user as illustrated below. The chosen function determines the remainder of settings available.
Front Panel DEMAND CALCULATION Remote Access DEMAND CALCULATION

Function: Sliding Window Demand Subperiods: 30 min Demand Period: 15 Subperiods Demand Period: 30 min

Function: Sliding Window

Demand Subperiods: 30 min

Demand Period: 15 Subperiods

Demand Period: 30 min

1.11.9

Function The function setting cell determines the type of demand calculation used as described in the table.
Front Panel Function: Fixed Window Function: Sliding Window Function: Thermal Function: Thermal Characteristic Function: Sliding Window Remote Access Function: Fixed Window

1.11.10 Demand subperiods (sliding window only) The demand subperiods setting cell is only be visible if the sliding window function has been chosen. The cell can be used to set the subperiod length, in minutes, from 1 to 99.
Front Panel Demand Subperiods: 99 min Remote Access Demand Subperiods: 99 min

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 32 of 160

1.11.11 Demand period (sliding window) If the sliding window function has been chosen then this cell is used to select the number of subperiods. The number of subperiods can be between 1 and 15.
Front Panel Demand Period: 1 Subperiod Demand Period: 2 Subperiods Demand Period: 15 Subperiods Demand Period: 15 Subperiods Demand Period: 2 Subperiods Remote Access Demand Period: 1 Subperiods

1.11.12 Demand period (fixed window or thermal characteristic) If the fixed window or thermal characteristic functions have been chosen then this cell can be used to set the demand period length. The cell has a range of 1 to 99 minutes in steps of one minute.
Front Panel Demand Period: 99 mins Remote Access Demand Period: 99 mins

1.12

Analog outputs menu (where fitted) The analog outputs menu is presented to the user as shown below. The following sub-sections describe the particular case of analog output one.
Front Panel ANALOG OUTPUTS Remote Access ANALOG OUTPUTS

Analog Output 1: Van Analog Output 1 Full Scale: 100.0 % Analog Output 1 Slope: Single Analog Output 1 Span: 0...10 mA Uni Analog Output 2: Vbn Analog Output 2 Full Scale: 100.0 % Analog Output 2 Slope: Single Analog Output 2 Span: 0...10 mA Uni Analog Output 3: Vcn

Analog Output 1: Van

Full Scale: 100.0 %

Slope: Single

Span: 0...10 mA Uni

Analog Output 2: Vbn

Full Scale: 100.0 %

Slope: Single

Span: 0...10 mA Uni

Analog Output 3: Vcn

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 33 of 160

Analog Output 3 Full Scale: 100.0 % Analog Output 3 Slope: Single Analog Output 3 Span: 0...10 mA Uni Analog Output 4: Vab Analog Output 4 Full Scale: 99.9% Analog Output 4 Slope: Single Analog Output 4 Span: 0...10 mA Uni

Full Scale: 100.0 %

Slope: Single

Span: 0...10 mA Uni

Analog Output 4: Vab

Full Scale: 99.9%

Slope: Single

Span: 0...10 mA Uni

1.12.1

Analog output 1 measurand This setting cell indicates the measurand assigned to Analog output 1. The possible states of this cell are:
Front Panel Analog Output 1: Disabled Analog Output 1: Frequency Analog Output 1: Pt Analog Output 1: Qt Analog Output 1: St Analog Output 1: PF Analog Output 1: Analog Output 1: a Analog Output 1: b Analog Output 1: c Analog Output 1: PF Analog Output 1: St Analog Output 1: Qt Analog Output 1: Pt Analog Output 1: Frequency Remote Access Analog Output 1: Disabled

a
Analog Output 1:

b
Analog Output 1:

c
Analog Output 1: Analog Output 1: n

n
Analog Output 1: Van Analog Output 1: Vbn Analog Output 1: Vbn Analog Output 1: Van

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 34 of 160

Analog Output 1: Vcn Analog Output 1: Vab Analog Output 1: Vbc Analog Output 1: Vca

Analog Output 1: Vcn

Analog Output 1: Vab

Analog Output 1: Vbc

Analog Output 1: Vca

1.12.2

Analog output 1 full scale This setting cell allows the user to define the full scale value of the selected input measurand. The full scale range is 1.0 % to 200.0 % in steps of 0.1 %.

1.12.3

Analog output 1 slope This setting cell allows the user to select the desired output slope, its possible states are shown below.
Front Panel Analog Output 1 Slope: Single Analog Output 1 Slope: Dual Analog Output 1 Slope: Dual Remote Access Analog Output 1 Slope: Single

1.12.4

Analog output 1 X-breakpoint This setting cell allows the user to set the x-breakpoint value. The setting range shall be 0.0 % to 100.0 % in 0.1 % steps. This is only applicable for dual slope settings.

1.12.5

Analog output 1 Y-breakpoint This setting cell allows the user to set the y-breakpoint value. The setting range is 0.0 % to 100.0 % in 0.1 % steps. This is only applicable for dual slope settings.

1.12.6

Analog output 1 span This setting cell allows the user to select the output current span. The possible states of the cell are shown below.
Front Panel Analog Output 1 Span: 0...10 mA Uni Analog Output 1 Span: 0...20 mA Uni Analog Output 1 Span: 4...20 mA Uni Analog Output 1 Span: 0...10 mA Bi Analog Output 1 Span: 0...20 mA Bi Analog Output 1 Span: 0...20 mA Bi Analog Output 1 Span: 0...20 mA Bi Analog Output 1 Span: 4...20 mA Uni Analog Output 1 Span: 0...20 mA Uni Remote Access Analog Output 1 Span: 0...10 mA Uni

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 35 of 160

Analog Output 1 Span: 4...20 mA Bi

Analog Output 1 Span: 0...20 mA Bi

1.13

Setpoint group 1, 2, 3, and 4 menus Setpoint Group menus 1 to 4 follow the same format as each other, the only difference being the reference number. This section uses Setpoint Group 1 element 1 as an example to describe how the data is displayed to the user.
Front Panel SETPOINT GROUP 1 Remote Access SETPOINT GROUP 1

Setpoint Group 1 Delay: 60 sec Setpoint G1,E1: Van Setpoint G1,E1 High Level: 120.3 % Setpoint G1,E1 Low Level: 88.4 %

Delay: 60 sec

Element 1: Van

High Level: 120.3 %

Low Level: 88.4 %

1.13.1

Setpoint group 1 delay This setting cell allows the user to enter the Setpoint Group delay. The setting range can be 1 to 60 seconds in steps of one second.

1.13.2

Setpoint group 1 element 1 Each Setpoint Group has eight elements. The user is able to disable the element or select one of the available measurands. The table below shows the possible states of this cell for Setpoint Group 1, element 1 for both a disabled configuration and with the setpoint of Frequency.
Front Panel Setpoint G1,E1: Disabled Setpoint G1,E1: Frequency Element 1: Frequency Remote Access Element 1: Disabled

1.13.3 1.13.4

Setpoint group 1 element 1 high level This setting cell is used to set the high alarm level value as a percentage. Setpoint group 1 element 1 low level This setting cell is used to set the low alarm level value as a percentage.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 36 of 160

1.14

Relay outputs menu The relay outputs menu is presented to the user as in the table which uses relay 1 as an example.
Front Panel RELAY OUTPUTS Remote Access RELAY OUTPUTS

Relay 1 Relay 1 Assignment: Setpoint Group 1 Relay 1 Label: Relay Output 1 Relay 1 Contacts: Normally Open Contacts: Normally Open Label: Relay Output 1 Assignment: Setpoint Group 1

1.14.1

Relay 1 assignment This setting cell is used to select the assignment of relay 1. The possible states are:
Front Panel Relay 1 Assignment: Disabled Relay 1 Assignment: Setpoint Group 1 Relay 1 Assignment: Setpoint Group 2 Relay 1 Assignment: Setpoint Group 3 Relay 1 Assignment: Setpoint Group 4 Relay 1 Assignment: Pulsed Import kWh Relay 1 Assignment: Pulsed Export kWh Relay 1 Assignment: Pulsed Export kVArh Relay 1 Assignment: Pulsed Import kVArh Relay 1 Assignment: Watchdog Relay 1 Assignment: Watchdog Relay 1 Assignment: Pulsed Import kVArh Relay 1 Assignment: Pulsed Export kVArh Relay 1 Assignment: Pulsed Export kWh Relay 1 Assignment: Pulsed Import kWh Relay 1 Assignment: Setpoint Group 4 Relay 1 Assignment: Setpoint Group 3 Relay 1 Assignment: Setpoint Group 2 Relay 1 Assignment: Setpoint Group 1 Remote Access Relay 1 Assignment: Disabled

1.14.2

Relay X label This setting cell allows the user to enter a 14 character (ASCII TEXT) label representing the relay X. The default label is Relay Output X

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 37 of 160

1.14.3

Relay contacts This setting cell is used to select the default state of the relays contacts.
Front Panel Relay 1 Contacts: Normally Open Relay 1 Assignment: Normally Closed Relay 1 Contacts: Normally Closed Remote Access Relay 1 Contacts: Normally Open

1.14.4

Import kWh pulse duration This setting cell allows the user to select the desired pulse duration for Import kWh. The table below illustrates the possible states of the cell.
Front Panel Import kWh Pulse Duration: 100 ms Import kWh Pulse Duration: 200 ms Import kWh Pulse Duration: 400 ms Pulse Duration: 400 ms Pulse Duration: 200 ms Remote Access Pulse Duration: 100 ms

1.14.5 1.14.6 1.14.7

Import kWh pulse rate This setting cell can be set between 1-4000 pph in steps of one. Import kWh full scale This setting cell can be set between 1.000%-200.0 % in steps of 0.1 %. Export kWh, export kVArh, and import kVArh The cell structure for import watts can be repeated for export watts, import kVArh and export kVArh.

1.15

Opto inputs menu (where fitted)


Front Panel Opto Input 1: Disabled Opto Input 1 Label: Opto Input 1 Opto Input 2: Disabled Opto Input 2 Label: Opto Input 2 Label: Opto Input 2 Opto Input 2: Disabled Label: Opto Input 1 Remote Access Opto Input 1: Disabled

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 38 of 160

1.15.1

Opto input X The Opto Input X setting cell allows the user to set the operation mode of the input. The possible states being.
Front Panel Opto Input X: Disabled Opto Input X: Demand Sync Opto Input X: Energy Sync Opto Input X: Energy & Demand Sync Opto Input X: Pulse Counter Opto Input X: Clock Sync Opto Input X: Logic Levels Opto Input X: Logic Levels Opto Input X: Clock Sync Opto Input X: Pulse Counter Opto Input X: Energy & Demand Sync Opto Input X: Energy Sync Opto Input X: Demand Sync Remote Access Opto Input X: Disabled

1.15.2

Opto input X label This setting cell allows the user to enter a 14 character (ASCII TEXT) label representing Opto Input X. The default label is Opto Input X.

1.15.3

Tariff settings secondary column headings The primary column heading tariff settings are broken down into the secondary column headings as shown.
Front Panel TARIFF SETTINGS Remote Access TARIFF SETTINGS

RATE SWITCHING EVENTS 1-12 RATE SWITCHING EVENTS 13-24 RATE SWITCHING EVENTS 25-36 RATE SWITCHING EVENTS 37-48 SEASON SWITCHING EVENTS SWITCHING EVENTS IN SEASON FIXED DAY EXCLUSIONS

RATE SWITCHING EVENTS 1-12

RATE SWITCHING EVENTS 13-24

RATE SWITCHING EVENTS 25-36

RATE SWITCHING EVENTS 37-48

SEASON SWITCHING EVENTS

SWITCHING EVENTS IN SEASON

FIXED DAY EXCLUSIONS

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 39 of 160

FIXED DATE EXCLUSIONS RATE REGISTER DATA SOURCE

FIXED DATE EXCLUSIONS

RATE REGISTER DATA SOURCE

1.16

Rate switching events menus This subsection describes how the rate switching events menus are displayed to the user. The rate switching events 1 to 12 menu is displayed to the user as shown below. The remaining rate switching events (13-24, 25-36, and 37-48) follow exactly the same structure except for the reference to event numbers.
Front Panel RATE SWITCHING EVENTS 1-12 Event 1 Event 1 Activation Day: Disabled Event 1 Activation Hour: 0 Event 1 Activation Minute: 0 Event 1 Rates: 00101101 Event 2 Event 2 Activation Day: Disabled Event 2 Activation Hour: 0 Event 2 Activation Minute: 0 Event 2 Rates: 00000001 Event 12 Event 12 Activation Day: Disabled Event 12 Activation Hour: 0 Event 12 Activation Minute: 0 Event 12 Rates: 00000001 Rates: 00000001 Activation Minutes: 0 Activation Hour: 0 Activation Day: Disabled Rates: 00000001 Activation Minutes: 0 Activation Hour: 0 Activation Day: Disabled Rates: 00000001 Activation Minutes: 0 Activation Hour: 0 Activation Day: Disabled Remote Access RATE SWITCHING EVENTS 1-12

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 40 of 160

1.16.1

Activation day The possible states of the activation day setting cell are Disabled, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday or Sunday.

1.16.2 1.16.3 1.16.4

Activation hour This setting cell can be set between 0 and 23 hours in one hour steps. Activation minute This setting cell can be set between 0 and 59 minutes in one minute steps. Rates This setting cell displays the state of each rate register. A 1 indicates active whilst a 0 inactive. The and symbols indicates that the user can scroll left or right through each of the rate register states in a cyclic manner using the left and right arrow keys respectively. The symbol indicates that the user can return to the rate register cell.
Event 1 Rate Reg 1:1 Event 2 Rate Reg 2:0

etc. The user is able to enter setting mode in the normal manner from any of the displays. When in setting mode the user shall see the display shown below (the particular Rate Reg number displayed depends on where the setting mode was entered from). The Left and Right arrow keys can be used to scroll through the Rate Registers in a cyclic manner and the Up and Down arrow keys used to toggle the setting value between 0 and 1. The setting changes is accepted in the normal manner.
Event 1 Rate Reg 1:1

1.17

Season switching event menu The season switching event menu is presented to the user as shown in the table below.
Front Panel SEASON SWITCHING EVENTS Event 1 Event 1 Month: January Event 1 Day of Month: 1 Event 1 New Season: 2 New Season: 2 Day of Month: 1 Month: January Remote Access SEASON SWITCHING EVENTS

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 41 of 160

Event 12 Event 12 Month: March Event 12 Day of Month: 5 Event 12 New Season: 3 New Season: 3 Day of Month: 5 Month: March

1.17.1

Month This setting cell enables the user to select from Disabled, January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September, October, November, and December.

1.17.2 1.17.3 1.18

Day of month This setting cell allows the user to select in steps of 1 day from 1 to 31 days. New season This setting cell has a range of 0 to 11 in steps of one. Switching events in season menu
Front Panel SWITCHING EVENTS IN SEASON Switching Events In Season 0: 0 Switching Events In Season 1: 12 Switching Events In Season 11: 48 Season 11: 48 Season 1: 12 Season 0: 0 Remote Access SWITCHING EVENTS IN SEASON

1.18.1

Switching events in season This setting cell allows the user to select the number of events for each season. The cells states are 0, 1, 2, ... 48.

1.18.2

Fixed day exclusions.


Front Panel FIXED DAY EXCLUSION Remote Access FIXED DAY EXCLUSION Exclusion 1: Exclusion 1 Week: 1 Exclusion 1 Day: Monday Exclusion 1 Season to Use: 1 Season to Use: 1 Day: Monday Week: 1

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 42 of 160

Exclusion 1 Day to Use: Monday

Day to Use: Monday

Exclusion 8: Exclusion 8 Week: 1 Exclusion 8 Day: Monday Exclusion 8 Season to Use: 1 Exclusion 8 Day to Use: Monday Day to Use: Tuesday Season to Use: 1 Day: Monday Week: 1

1.18.3

Week cell This setting cell is used to select the fixed day exclusion week. The cells possible states are Disabled, 1, 2, ... 52.

1.18.4

Day cell This setting allows the user to select the fixed day exclusion day. The cells possible states are Monday, Tuesday, ... Sunday.

1.18.5

Season to use cell This setting cell allows the user to select the fixed day exclusion season to use. The cells possible states are 1, 2, ... 12.

1.18.6

Day to use cell This setting cell enables the user to select the fixed day exclusion day to use. The cells possible states are Monday, Tuesday, ... Sunday.

1.19

Fixed date exclusion menu


Front Panel FIXED DATE EXCLUSION Remote Access FIXED DATE EXCLUSION

Exclusion 1: Exclusion 1 Month: January Exclusion 1 Day of Month: 23 Exclusion 1 Season to Use: 1 Exclusion 1 Day to Use: Monday Exclusion 8: Exclusion 8 Month: January Exclusion 8 Day of Month: 20 Day of Month: 20 Month: January Day to Use: Monday Season to Use: 1 Day of Month: 23 Month: January

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 43 of 160

Exclusion 8 Season to Use: 1 Exclusion 8 Day to Use: Tuesday

Season to Use: 1

Day to Use: Tuesday

1.19.1

Month cell This setting cell is used to select the fixed date exclusion month. The cells possible states are Disabled, January, February, ... December.

1.19.2

Day of month cell This setting allows the user to select the fixed date exclusion day of month. The cells possible states are 1, 2, ... 31.

1.19.3

Season to use cell This setting cell allows the user to select the fixed date exclusion season to use. The cells possible states are 1, 2, ... 12.

1.19.4

Day to use cell This setting cell enables the user to select the fixed date exclusion day to use. The cells possible states are Monday, Tuesday, ... Sunday.

1.19.5

Rate register source


Front Panel RATE REGISTER DATA SOURCE Rate Register 1: Import Total kWh Rate Register 2: Import Total kWh Rate Register 3: Export Total kWh Rate Register 4: Import Total kVArh Rate Register 5: Export Total kVArh Rate Register 6: Export Total kW Rate Register 6: Export Total kWh Rate Register 5: Export Total kVArh Rate Register 4: Import Total kVArh Rate Register 3: Export Total kWh Rate Register 2: Import Total kWh Rate Register 1: Import Total kWh Remote Access RATE REGISTER DATA SOURCE

1.19.6

Rate register data source cell The rate register data source cells enable the user to select the data source for each register. Each rate register data source cell has one of the states shown in the table.

Section 2.
Ind SYSTEM DATA 0 1 2 3 Password: **** 20 Characters + NULL 20 Characters + NULL 15 Characters + NULL 6 Digits + 1 Alpha Description: Measurement Centre Plant Reference: <User Defined> Model Number: H100A1100120CEA Serial Number: 123456A Frequency (Hz): 50 Communication Level: 1 Address: 1 Software Ref 1: <To be defined> Software Ref 2: <To be defined> Opto Input Status: 00 Espanol Deutsch Francais English Language: English Values Cell Format String with default value

COURIER DATABASE MAP

Col

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

00

00

SYSTEM DATA

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

00

01

Language

Indexed String

00

02

Password

Ascii Password(4)

00

04

Description

Ascii Text(16)

00

05

Plant Reference

Ascii Text (16)

00

06

Model Number

Ascii Text(16)

00

08

Serial Number

Ascii Text(7)

00

09

Frequency (Hz)

Unsigned Integer (16)

00

0A

Communication Level

Unsigned Integer (16)

00

0B

Address

Unsigned Integer (16)

00

11

Software Ref 1

Ascii Text (16)

00

12

Software Ref 2

Ascii Text (16)

00

20

Opto Input Status

Binary Flags (2)

00

21

Relay Output Status

Binary Flags (4)

Relay Output Status: 0000

00 00000002h 00000004h

22

Alarm Status

Binary Flags (24)

00000001h

Watchdog Time-Out Reset Serial communication controller channel A test 1 Serial communication controller channel A test 1

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 44 of 160

Col 00000008h 00000010h 00000020h 00000040h 00000080h 00000100h 00000200h 00000400h 00000800h 00001000h 00002000h 00004000h 00008000h 00010000h 00020000h 00040000h 00080000h 00100000h 00200000h 00400000h 00800000h 00000001h 00000002h 00000004h EEPROM Error: LED status Real time clock is invalid Real time clock is inaccurate Analogue output serial port failed Group 1 Setpoint 1 Group 1 Setpoint 2 Group 1 Setpoint 3 Group 1 Setpoint 1: 0 Group 1 Setpoint 2: 0 Group 1 Setpoint 3: 0 EEPROM Error: event records EEPROM Error: metering data EEPROM Error: tariff settings EEPROM Error: setpoint group 4 settings EEPROM Error: setpoint group 3 settings EEPROM Error: setpoint group 2 settings EEPROM Error: setpoint group 1 settings EEPROM Error: opto input settings EEPROM Error: relay output settings EEPROM Error: analogue output settings EEPROM Error: demand settings EEPROM Error: communication settings EEPROM Error: disturbance recorder settings EEPROM Error: system modes settings EEPROM Error: immediate settings Serial communication controller channel B test 2 Serial communication controller channel B test 2

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

00

23

Setpoint Status

Binary Flags (32)

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 45 of 160

Col 00000008h 00000010h 00000020h 00000040h 00000080h 00000100h 00000200h 00000400h 00000800h 00001000h 00002000h 00004000h 00008000h 00010000h 00020000h 00040000h 00080000h 00100000h 00200000h 00400000h 00800000h 01000000h 02000000h 04000000h Group 3 Setpoint 7 Group 3 Setpoint 8 Group 4 Setpoint 1 Group 4 Setpoint 2 Group 4 Setpoint 3 Group 3 Setpoint 6 Group 3 Setpoint 5 Group 3 Setpoint 4 Group 3 Setpoint 3 Group 3 Setpoint 2 Group 3 Setpoint 1 Group 2 Setpoint 8 Group 2 Setpoint 7 Group 2 Setpoint 6 Group 2 Setpoint 5 Group 2 Setpoint 4 Group 2 Setpoint 3 Group 2 Setpoint 2 Group 2 Setpoint 2: 0 Group 2 Setpoint 3: 0 Group 2 Setpoint 4: 0 Group 2 Setpoint 5: 0 Group 2 Setpoint 6: 0 Group 2 Setpoint 7: 0 Group 2 Setpoint 8: 0 Group 3 Setpoint 1: 0 Group 3 Setpoint 2: 0 Group 3 Setpoint 3: 0 Group 3 Setpoint 4: 0 Group 3 Setpoint 5: 0 Group 3 Setpoint 6: 0 Group 3 Setpoint 7: 0 Group 3 Setpoint 8: 0 Group 4 Setpoint 1: 0 Group 4 Setpoint 2: 0 Group 4 Setpoint 3: 0 Group 2 Setpoint 1 Group 2 Setpoint 1: 0 Group 1 Setpoint 8 Group 1 Setpoint 8: 0 Group 1 Setpoint 7 Group 1 Setpoint 7: 0 Group 1 Setpoint 6 Group 1 Setpoint 6: 0 Group 1 Setpoint 5 Group 1 Setpoint 5: 0 Group 1 Setpoint 4 Group 1 Setpoint 4: 0

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302 R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 46 of 160

Col 08000000h 10000000h 20000000h 40000000h 80000000h Group 4 Setpoint 8 Group 4 Setpoint 8: 0 Group 4 Setpoint 7 Group 4 Setpoint 7: 0 Group 4 Setpoint 6 Group 4 Setpoint 6: 0 Group 4 Setpoint 5 Group 4 Setpoint 5: 0 Group 4 Setpoint 4 Group 4 Setpoint 4: 0

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

00 0 1 2 4 Uppercase letters + NULL 4 Uppercase letters + NULL Full access up to level 2 user password Level 1 Password: **** Level 2 Password: **** Full access up to level 1 user password Menu is fully protected

D0

Active Access Level

Unsigned Integer(16) Password Control: Menu Fully Protected

00

D1

Password Control

Indexed String (16)

00

D2

Level 1 Password

Ascii Password(4)

00

D3

Level 2 Password

Ascii Password(4)

01 0 1 2 3 0 1 0 1 0 1 On Off Primary Secondary Four Analogue Outputs & DC Input Four relays & Two Status Inputs No Options Fitted

00

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Fitted Hardware: No Options Fitted

01

01

Fitted Hardware

Indexed String

Four relays, Two Status Inputs, Four Analogue Outputs & DC Input RS485 Modbus and IEC870 Courier K-Bus Courier and RS232 Modbus Display Mode: Secondary Comms Protocol: Mod/RS485 Cou/IEC870

01

02

Comms Protocol

Indexed String

01

03

Display Mode

Indexed String

01

04

LCD Backlight

Indexed String

LCD Backlight: Off

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 47 of 160

01

05

Real Time Clock

IEC Time & Date

Real Time Clock

Col 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 to 31 Days Disabled 60 min 30 min 15 min 10 min 5 min 1 min 30 s Disabled Clock Synchronisation: Disabled

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

01

06

Clock Synch

Indexed String

01

07

Max Clock Synch

Indexed String

02 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 1 3 phase 4 wire balanced (1 volts, 1 current) 3 phase 3 wire balanced (3 volts, 1 current) 3 phase 3 wire unbalanced (3 volts, 2 currents) 3 phase 4 wire unbalanced (2 volts, 3 currents) 3 phase 4 wire unbalanced (3 volts, 3 currents) 2 phase 3 wire system (2 volts, 2 currents) 3 phase 3 wire balanced (2 volts, 2 currents) Single Phase (L, N)

00

SYSTEM MODES

02

01

Connection Mode

Indexed String

02

02

Power Flow Mode

Indexed String

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 48 of 160

Col 0 1 - 9999 Value entered = nominal value of I/P current 0 1 - 99,999 (V) Value entered = nominal value of I/P voltage 0 1 2 3 Abort Setting Changes Accept New Settings Settings Changed Settings OK (V) No Primary Circuit (A) No Primary Circuit

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

02

03

C.T. Primary

Unsigned Integer(32)

02

04

C.T. Secondary

IEEE Float

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

02

05

V.T. Primary

Unsigned Integer(32)

02

06

V.T. Secondary

IEEE Float

02

07

Save Settings

Indexed String

03 0 1 0 1 Indexed String 1 0 1 0 1 0 NO YES - RESETS TO 0 NO NO YES - RESETS TO 0 YES - RESETS TO 0 0 YES - RESETS TO 0 NO YES - RESETS TO 0 NO

00

SYSTEM COMMANDS

03

01

Reset Energy Meter

Indexed String

03

02

Reset Demand

Indexed String

03

03

Reset Energy Meter and Demand

NO

03

04

Reset Pulse Counts

Indexed String

03

05

Reset Local LEDs

Indexed String

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 49 of 160

03

06

Restore Password Protection

Indexed String

Col 1 0 1 2 3 Capture C-ph Data Capture B-ph Data Capture A-ph Data Capture Off YES - RESETS TO 0

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03

07

Start Fast Waveform Capture

Indexed String

04

00

MEASUREMENTS

04

01

Van

Courier Voltage

04

02

Vbn

Courier Voltage

04

03

Vcn

Courier Voltage

04

04

Vab

Courier Voltage

04

05

Vbc

Courier Voltage

04

06

Vca

Courier Voltage

04

07

Ia

Courier Current

04

08

Ib

Courier Current

04

09

Ic

Courier Current

04

0A

In

Courier Current

04

0B

Frequency

Courier Frequency

04

0C

dc Input

IEEE Float

04

0D

Pulse Count 1

Unsigned Integer (16)

04

0E

Pulse Count 2

Unsigned Integer (16)

04

0F

V %NPS

Courier Percentage

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 50 of 160

04

10

I %NPS

Courier Percentage

Col

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

05

00

POWER / ENERGY MEASUREMENTS

05

01

REAL POWER

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

05

02

A Phase Real Power

Courier Power

05

03

B Phase Real Power

Courier Power

05

04

C Phase Real Power

Courier Power

05

05

REACTIVE POWER

05

06

A Phase Reactive Power

Courier var

05

07

B Phase Reactive Power

Courier var

05

08

C Phase Reactive Power

Courier var

05

09

APPARENT POWER

05

0A

A Phase Apparent Power

Courier VA

05

0B

B Phase Apparent Power

Courier VA

05

0C

C Phase Apparent Power

Courier VA

05

0D

Total Real Power

Courier Power

05

0E

Total Reactive Power

Courier var

05

0F

Total Apparent Power

Courier VA

05

10

Total Power Factor

Courier Reserved

05

11

Import Real Energy

Courier Wh

05

12

Export Real Energy

Courier Wh

05

13

Import Reactive Energy

Courier varh

05

14

Export Reactive Energy

Courier varh

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 51 of 160

06

00

DEMAND VALUES

Col

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

06

01

DYNAMIC DEMAND VALUES

06

02

Time Into Period (min)

Unsigned Integer(16)

06

03

Import Real Power

Courier Power

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

06

04

Export Real Power

Courier Power

06

05

Import Reactive Power

Courier var

06

06

Export Reactive Power

Courier var

06

07

Positive Apparent Power

Courier VA

06

08

Negative Apparent Power

Courier VA

06

09

Power Factor

Courier Reserved

06

0A

Ia

Courier Current

06

0B

Ib

Courier Current

06

0C

Ic

Courier Current

06

0D

PREVIOUS PERIOD

06

0E

Import Real Power

Courier Power

06

0F

Export Real Power

Courier Power

06

10

Import Reactive Power

Courier var

06

11

Export Reactive Power

Courier var

06

12

Positive Apparent Power

Courier VA

06

13

Negative Apparent Power

Courier VA

06

14

Power Factor

Courier Reserved

06

15

Ia

Courier Current

06

16

Ib

Courier Current

06

17

Ic

Courier Current

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 52 of 160

06

18

MAX DEMAND SINCE LAST RESET

Col

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

06

19

Import Real Power

Courier Power

06

1A

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

06

1B

Export Real Power

Courier Power

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

06

1C

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

06

1D

Import Reactive Power

Courier var

06

1E

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

06

1F

Export Reactive Power

Courier var

06

20

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

06

21

Positive Apparent Power

Courier VA

06

22

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

06

23

Negative Apparent Power

Courier VA

06

24

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

06

25

Power Factor

Courier Reserved

06

26

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

06

27

Ia

Courier Current

06

28

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

06

29

Ib

Courier Current

06

2A

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

06

2B

Ic

Courier Current

06

2C

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

06

2D

PRESENT DAY MAX DEMAND

06

2E

Import Real Power

Courier Power

06

2F

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 53 of 160

06

30

Export Real Power

Courier Power

Col

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

06

31

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

06

32

Import Reactive Power

Courier var

06

33

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

06

34

Export Reactive Power

Courier var

06

35

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

06

36

Positive Apparent Power

Courier VA

06

37

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

06

38

Negative Apparent Power

Courier VA

06

39

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

06

3A

Power Factor

Courier Reserved

06

3B

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

06

3C

Ia

Courier Current

06

3D

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

06

3E

Ib

Courier Current

06

3F

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

06

40

Ic

Courier Current

06

41

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

07

00

7-DAY MAXIMUM DEMANDS

07

01

DAY 1 MAX DEMAND

07

02

Import Real Power

Courier Power

07

03

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

07

04

Export Real Power

Courier Power

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 54 of 160

07

05

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

Col

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

07

06

Import Reactive Power

Courier var

07

07

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

07

08

Export Reactive Power

Courier var

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

07

09

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

07

0A

Positive Apparent Power

Courier VA

07

0B

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

07

0C

Negative Apparent Power

Courier VA

07

0D

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

07

0E

Power Factor

Courier Reserved

07

0F

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

07

10

Ia

Courier Current

07

11

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

07

12

Ib

Courier Current

07

13

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

07

14

Ic

Courier Current

07 SAME AS DAY 1 SAME AS DAY 1 SAME AS DAY 1 SAME AS DAY 1 SAME AS DAY 1 SAME AS DAY 1

15

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

07

16

DAY 2 MAX DEMAND

07

XX

DAY 3 MAX DEMAND

07

XX

DAY 4 MAX DEMAND

07

XX

DAY 5 MAX DEMAND

07

XX

DAY 6 MAX DEMAND

07

XX

DAY 7 MAX DEMAND

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 55 of 160

08

00

TARIFF METER

Col 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 0 1 2 3 4 Switching Events In Season >48 Switch to Invalid Season Duplicate Season Switching Events Duplicate Rate Switching Events Settings OK Rate Register 8 Active (bit-mask) Rate Register 7 Active (bit-mask) Rate Register 6 Active (bit-mask) Rate Register 5 Active (bit-mask) Rate Register 4 Active (bit-mask) Rate Register 3 Active (bit-mask) Rate Register 2 Active (bit-mask) Rate Register 1 Active (bit-mask)

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

08

01

Active Rate Registers

Binary Flags (8)

08

02

Tariff Settings Status

Indexed String

08

03

Rate 1

Unsigned Integer (32)

08

04

Rate 2

Unsigned Integer (32)

08

05

Rate 3

Unsigned Integer (32)

08

06

Rate 4

Unsigned Integer (32)

08

07

Rate 5

Unsigned Integer (32)

08

08

Rate 6

Unsigned Integer (32)

08

09

Rate 7

Unsigned Integer (32)

08

0A

Rate 8

Unsigned Integer (32)

09

00

TOTAL HARMONIC DATA

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 56 of 160

09

01

Van THD

Courier Percentage

Col

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

09

02

Vbn THD

Courier Percentage

09

03

Vcn THD

Courier Percentage

09

04

Vab THD

Courier Percentage

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

09

05

Vbc THD

Courier Percentage

09

06

Vca THD

Courier Percentage

09

07

Ia THD

Courier Percentage

09

08

Ib THD

Courier Percentage

09

09

Ic THD

Courier Percentage

0A

00

PHASE VOLTAGE HARMONIC DATA

0A

01

VA HARMONIC DATA

0A

02

2nd Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0A

03

3rd Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0A

04

4th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0A

05

5th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0A

06

6th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0A

07

7th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0A

08

8th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0A

09

9th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0A

0A

10th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0A

0B

11th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0A

0C

12th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0A

0D

13th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 57 of 160

0A

0E

14th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

Col

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

0A SAME AS VA HARMONIC DATA SAME AS VA HARMONIC DATA

0F

15th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0A

10

VB HARMONIC DATA

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

0A

XX

VC HARMONIC DATA

0B

00

LINE VOLTAGE HARMONIC DATA

0B

01

VAB HARMONIC DATA

0B

02

2nd Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0B

03

3rd Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0B

04

4th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0B

05

5th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0B

06

6th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0B

07

7th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0B

08

8th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0B

09

9th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0B

0A

10th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0B

0B

11th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0B

0C

12th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0B

0D

13th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0B

0E

14th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0B

0F

15th Harmonic

Courier Percentage SAME AS VAB HARMONIC DATA SAME AS VAB HARMONIC DATA

0B

10

VBC HARMONIC DATA

0B

XX

VCA HARMONIC DATA

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 58 of 160

0C

00

PHASE CURRENT HARMONIC DATA

Col

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

0C

01

IA HARMONIC DATA

0C

02

2nd Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0C

03

3rd Harmonic

Courier Percentage

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

0C

04

4th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0C

05

5th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0C

06

6th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0C

07

7th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0C

08

8th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0C

09

9th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0C

0A

10th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0C

0B

11th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0C

0C

12th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0C

0D

13th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0C

0E

14th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0C SAME AS IA HARMONIC DATA SAME AS IA HARMONIC DATA

0F

15th Harmonic

Courier Percentage

0C

10

IB HARMONIC DATA

0C

XX

IC HARMONIC DATA

10 1

00

VIEW RECORDS 1, 2 Alarm Records.

10

01

No of Records

Unsigned Integer (16)

10

02

Record Number

Unsigned Integer (16)

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 59 of 160

10

03

Time Stamp

Unsigned Integer (16)

Col Indexed Sting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 EEPROM Error: Tariff Settings EEPROM Error: Metering Data EEPROM Error: Event Records EEPROM Error: LED Status Real Time Clock Is Invalid Real Time Clock Is Inaccurate EEPROM Error: Analogue O/P Port Fail EEPROM Error: Setpoint Gp 3 Settings EEPROM Error: Setpoint Gp 4 Settings EEPROM Error: Setpoint Gp 2 Settings EEPROM Error: Setpoint Gp 1 Settings EEPROM Error: Opto I/P Settings EEPROM Error: Relay O/P Settings EEPROM Error: Analogue O/P settings EEPROM Error: Demand Settings EEPROM Error: Comms Settings EEPROM Error: Dist Rec Settings EEPROM Error: System Mode Settings EEPROM Error: Immediate Settings Serial Communication Controller Channel B Test 2 Fail Serial Communication Controller Channel B Test 1 Fail Serial Communication Controller Channel A Test 2 Fail Serial Communication Controller Channel A Test 1 Fail 0 Watchdog Time-Out Reset

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

10

04

ALARM EVENT (depends on Event Type)

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 60 of 160

Col 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 1 2 4 8 1 2 Input 2 (bitmap) Input 1 (bitmap) Output 4 (bitmap) Output 3 (bitmap) Output 2 (bitmap) Output 1 (bitmap) Password (Level 2) access Password (Level 1) access Password (Level 0) access Real Time Clock Set Exit Waveform Capture Frequency Tracking Restored Enter Waveform Capture Frequency Tracking Fail EEPROM Error: Calibration Values EEPROM Error: Configuration Settings

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

10

05

OUTPUT CONTACT CHANGE Binary Flags (4)

10

06

LOGIC INPUT CHANGE

Binary Flags (2)

10 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 Setpoint Group 3 Setpoint Group 4 Invalid Element Element 1 Setpoint Group 2 Setpoint Group 1 Invalid Group

07

SETPOINT EVENT

10

08

Group

Indexed String

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 61 of 160

10

09

Element

Indexed String

Col 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 In Ic Ib Ia Positive Total VA Demand Negative Total VA Demand Total Power Factor Demand Export Total VAr Demand Import Total VAr Demand Export Total Watts Demand Import Total Watts Demand Total Power Factor Total Apparent Power Total Reactive Power Total Real Power Frequency No Input Element 8 Element 7 Element 6 Element 5 Element 4 Element 3 Element 2

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

10

0A

Parameter

Indexed String

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 62 of 160

Col 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 dc VNPS Vca THD Vbc THD Vab THD Vcn THD Vbn THD Van THD Vca Vbc Vab Vcn Vbn Van INPS Ic THD Ib THD Ia THD Ic Demand Ib Demand Ia Demand

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

10 0 1

0B

Value

Courier Reserved Low Alarm High Alarm

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 63 of 160

10

0C

Low / High

Indexed String

Col 0 1 0 1 Yes - Resets to 0 No Alarm Trip Alarm Reset

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

10

0D

Reset / Trip

Indexed String

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

10

0E

Clear All Event Records

Indexed String

11 0 1 2 0 0 1 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 Record, 18 Cycles 3 Record, 24 Cycles 2 Record, 36 Cycles 1 Record, 72 Cycles 4 Record, 9 Cycles 3 Record, 12 Cycles 2 Record, 18 Cycles 1 Record, 36 Cycles 48 24 ADC Samples Running Triggered Stopped

00

DISTURBANCE RECORDER

11

01

Recorder Status

Indexed String

11

02

Data Source

Indexed String

11

03

Samples per cycle

Indexed String

11

04

Record Configuration

Indexed String

11 2exp0

05

Post Trigger Cycle: 36

Unsigned Integer (32) Group 1, Element 1

11

06

Setpoint Trigger

Binary Flags (32)

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 64 of 160

Col

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

2 exp31 2exp0 2exp1 1 0 1 Indexed String 1 0 1 2 3 Abort Setting Changes Accept New Settings Settings Changed Settings OK Yes - Resets to 0 0 No Yes - Resets to 0 No 1, 2 Alarm Records. Opto I/P 2 Opto I/P 1

Group 4, Element 8

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

11

07

Opto Input Trigger

Binary Flags (2)

11

08

Records Stored

Unsigned Integer (16)

11

09

Trigger Disturbance Recorder

IndexedString

11

0A

Clear Wave Capture & Disturb Records

11

0B

Save Settings

Indexed String

20 0 1 Enabled Disabled

00

COMMS SETTINGS

20

01

Modem Control

Indexed String

20 0 1 2 3 4800 9600 2400 1200

02

Modbus Address

Unsigned Integer(16)

20

03

Modbus Baud Rate

Indexed String

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 65 of 160

Col 4 0 1 2 1 start, 8 data, odd parity, 1 stop bit 1 start, 8 data, even parity, 1 stop bit 1 start, 8 data, no parity, 1 stop 19200

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

20

04

Modbus Framing

Indexed String

20 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 0 1 2 3 Abort Setting Changes Accept New Settings Settings Changed Settings OK 10 bit 11 bit 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200

05

Courier Address

Unsigned Integer(16)

20

06

IEC870 Baud Rate

Indexed String

20

07

IEC870 Framing

Indexed String

20

08

Save Settings

Indexed String

21 0 1 2 Minutes Number of Subperiods 0 Settings OK Thermal Sliding Window Fixed Window

00

DEMAND CALCULATION

21

01

Function

Indexed String

21

02

Demand Subperiods (min)

Unsigned Integer (16)

21

03

Demand Period (subperiods)

Unsigned Integer (16)

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 66 of 160

21

04

Save Settings

Indexed String

Col 1 2 3 Abort Setting Changes Accept New Settings Settings Changed

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

22

00

ANALOGUE OUTPUTS

22 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 % 0 Single Vca Vbc Vab Vcn Vbn Van In Ic Ib Ia Total Power Factor Total Apparent Power Total Reactive Power Total Real Power Frequency Disabled

01

ANALOGUE OUTPUT 1

22

02

Parameter

Indexed String

22

03

Full Scale

Courier Percent

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 67 of 160

22

04

Slope

Indexed String

Col 1 % % 0 1 2 3 4 5 4 ... 20 mA Bi-directional i/p 0 ... 20 mA Bi-directional i/p 0 ... 10 mA Bi-directional i/p 4 ... 20 mA Uni-directional i/p 0 ... 20 mA Uni-directional i/p 0 ... 10 mA Uni-directional i/p Dual

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

22

05

X-Breakpoint

Courier Percent

22

06

Y-Breakpoint

Courier Percent

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

22

07

Span

Indexed String

22

08

ANALOGUE OUTPUT 2

22

xx

ANALOGUE OUTPUT 3

22 0 1 2 3 Abort Setting Changes Accept New Settings Settings Changed Settings OK

xx

ANALOGUE OUTPUT 4

22

xx

Save Settings

Indexed String

23

00

RELAY OUTPUTS

23 0 1 2 3 4 Disabled Setpoint Group 1 Setpoint Group 2 Setpoint Group 3 Setpoint Group 4

01

OUTPUT 1

23

02

Assignment

Indexed String

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 68 of 160

Col 5 6 7 8 9 14 Characters - Relay O/P 1 0 1 Normally Closed Normally Open Watchdog Pulsed Export Total kvarh Pulsed Import Total kvarh Pulsed Export Total kWh Pulsed Import Total kWh

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

23

03

Label

Ascii Text

23

04

Default State

Indexed String

23

05

OUTPUT 2

23

09

OUTPUT 3

23

0D

OUTPUT 4

23

11

PULSED OUTPUTS

23 0 1 2 Pulses per hour % 400ms 200ms 100ms

12

Import kWh

23

13

Pulse Duration

Indexed String

23

14

Pulse Rate (pph)

Unsigned Integer (16)

23

15

Full Scale

Courier Percent

23

16

Export kWh

23

1A

Import kvarh

23 0 1 2 Settings OK

1E

Export kvarh

23

22

Save Settings

Indexed String

Settings Changed Accept New Settings

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 69 of 160

Col 3 Abort Setting Changes

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

24

00

OPTO INPUTS

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

24 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 14 Characters - Opto Input 1 Logic Levels Clock Synchronisation Pulse Counter Demand and Energy Synchronisation Energy Synchronisation Demand Synchronisation Disabled

01

INPUT 1

24

02

Assignment

Indexed String

24

03

Label

Ascii Text

24

04

INPUT 2

24 14 Characters - Opto Input 2 0 1 2 3 Abort Setting Changes Accept New Settings Settings Changed Settings OK

05

Assignment

Indexed String

24

06

Label

Ascii Text

24

22

Save Settings

Indexed String

25 Seconds

00

SETPOINT GROUP 1

25

01

Delay (seconds)

Unsigned Integer (32)

25 0

02

ELEMENT 1 Disabled

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 70 of 160

25

03

Parameter

Indexed String

Col 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 INPS Van Ic THD Ib THD Ia THD Ic Demand Ib Demand Ia Demand In Ic Ib Ia Total Power Factor Demand Negative Total VA Demand Positive Total VA Demand Export Total var Demand Import Total var Demand Export Total Watts Demand Import Total Watts Demand Total Power Factor Total Apparent Power Total Reactive Power Total Real Power Frequency

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 71 of 160

Col 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 dc VNPS Vca THD Vbc THD Vab THD Vcn THD Vbn THD Van THD Vca Vbc Vab Vcn Vbn

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

25

04

High Set

Courier Percent

25

05

Low Set

Courier Percent

25

06

ELEMENT 2

25

0A

ELEMENT 3

25

0E

ELEMENT 4

25

12

ELEMENT 5

25

16

ELEMENT 6

25

1A

ELEMENT 7

25 0 1

1E

ELEMENT 8 Settings OK Settings Changed

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 72 of 160

25

22

Save Settings

Indexed String

Col 2 3 Abort Setting Changes Accept New Settings

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

26

00

SETPOINT GROUP 2

27

00

SETPOINT GROUP 3

28

00

SETPOINT GROUP 4

30

00

TARIFF - RATE SWITCHING EVENTS 1 - 12

30 0 1 to 7 Hour Minute 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 Rate Register 3 Rate Register 4 Rate Register 5 Rate Register 6 Rate Register 2 Rate Register 1 Rate Register 0 Monday...Sunday Disabled

01

EVENT 1

30

02

Activation Day

Indexed String

30

03

Activation Hour

Unsigned Integer (16)

30

04

Activation Minute

Unsigned Integer (16)

30

05

Active Rates

Binary Flags (8)

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 73 of 160

Col 128 Rate Register 7

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

30

06

EVENT 2

30

0B

EVENT 3

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

30

10

EVENT 4

30

15

EVENT 5

30

1A

EVENT 6

30

1F

EVENT 7

30

24

EVENT 8

30

29

EVENT 9

30

2E

EVENT 10

30

33

EVENT 11

30

38

EVENT 12

31

00

TARIFF - RATE SWITCHING EVENTS 13 - 24

31

01

EVENT 13

31

06

EVENT 14

31

0B

EVENT 15

31

10

EVENT 16

31

15

EVENT 17

31

1A

EVENT 18

31

1F

EVENT 19

31

24

EVENT 20

31

29

EVENT 21

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 74 of 160

31

2E

EVENT 22

Col

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

31

33

EVENT 23

31

38

EVENT 24

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

32

00

TARIFF - RATE SWITCHING EVENTS 25 - 36

32

01

EVENT 25

32

06

EVENT 26

32

0B

EVENT 27

32

10

EVENT 28

32

15

EVENT 29

32

1A

EVENT 30

32

1F

EVENT 31

32

24

EVENT 32

32

29

EVENT 33

32

2E

EVENT 34

32

33

EVENT 35

32

38

EVENT 36

33

00

TARIFF - RATE SWITCHING EVENTS 37 - 48

33

01

EVENT 37

33

06

EVENT 38

33

0B

EVENT 39

33

10

EVENT 40

33

15

EVENT 41

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 75 of 160

33

1A

EVENT 42

Col

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

33

1F

EVENT 43

33

24

EVENT 44

33

29

EVENT 45

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

33

2E

EVENT 46

33

33

EVENT 47

33

38

EVENT 48

34

00

TARIFF - SEASON SWITCHING EVENTS

34 0 1 to 12 January...December Disabled

01

EVENT 1

34

02

Month

Indexed String

34

03

Day of Month

Unsigned Integer (16)

34

04

New Season

Unsigned Integer (16)

34

05

EVENT 2

34

09

EVENT 3

34

0D

EVENT 4

34

11

EVENT 5

34

15

EVENT 6

34

19

EVENT 7

34

1D

EVENT 8

34

21

EVENT 9

34

25

EVENT 10

34

29

EVENT 11

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 76 of 160

34

2D

EVENT 12

Col

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

35 Number of Switching Events Number of Switching Events Number of Switching Events Number of Switching Events Number of Switching Events Number of Switching Events Number of Switching Events Number of Switching Events Number of Switching Events Number of Switching Events Number of Switching Events Number of Switching Events

00

TARIFF - SWITCHING EVENTS IN SEASON

35

01

Season 1

Unsigned Integer (16)

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

35

02

Season 2

Unsigned Integer (16)

35

03

Season 3

Unsigned Integer (16)

35

04

Season 4

Unsigned Integer (16)

35

05

Season 5

Unsigned Integer (16)

35

06

Season 6

Unsigned Integer (16)

35

07

Season 7

Unsigned Integer (16)

35

08

Season 8

Unsigned Integer (16)

35

09

Season 9

Unsigned Integer (16)

35

0A

Season 10

Unsigned Integer (16)

35

0B

Season 11

Unsigned Integer (16)

35

0C

Season 12

Unsigned Integer (16)

36

00

TARIFF - FIXED DAY EXCLUSIONS

36 0 1 to 52 0 to 6 Monday to Sunday Week Number Disabled

01

EXCLUSION 1

36

02

Week

Indexed String

36

03

Day

Indexed String

36 0 to 6

04

Season To Use

Unsigned Integer (16) Monday to Sunday

36

05

Day To Use

Indexed String

36

06

EXCLUSION 2

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 77 of 160

36

0B

EXCLUSION 3

Col

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

36

10

EXCLUSION 4

36

15

EXCLUSION 5

36

1A

EXCLUSION 6

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

36

1F

EXCLUSION 7

36

24

EXCLUSION 8

37

00

TARIFF - FIXED DATE EXCLUSIONS

37 0 1 to 12 January to December Disabled

01

EXCLUSION 1

37

02

Month

Indexed String

37

03

Day Of Month

Unsigned Integer (16)

37 0 to 6 Monday...Sunday

04

Season To Use

Unsigned Integer (16)

37

05

Day To Use

Indexed String

37

06

EXCLUSION 2

37

0B

EXCLUSION 3

37

10

EXCLUSION 4

37

15

EXCLUSION 5

37

1A

EXCLUSION 6

37

1F

EXCLUSION 7

37

24

EXCLUSION 8

38 0 1

00

TARIFF RATE REGISTER CONFIGURATION Disabled Import Watts

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 78 of 160

38

01

Rate Register 1

Indexed String

Col 2 3 4 Export vars Import vars Export Watts

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

38

02

Rate Register 2

Indexed String

38

03

Rate Register 3

Indexed String

38

04

Rate Register 4

Indexed String

38

05

Rate Register 5

Indexed String

38

06

Rate Register 6

Indexed String

38

07

Rate Register 7

Indexed String

38

08

Rate Register 8

Indexed String

39 0 1 2 3 Abort Setting Changes Accept New Settings Settings Changed Settings OK

00

TARIFF - SAVE/ABORT FAMILY SETTINGS

39

01

Save Settings

Indexed String

40

00

DISTURBANCE RECORDS

40

01

Record Number

Unsigned Integer (16) Disturbance Record Time Stamp Available Channels in Disturbance Record Channel Type (Analogue / Digital)

40

02

Trigger Time

IEC Time & Date

40

03

Channels Available

Binary Flags (10)

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 79 of 160

40

04

Channel Type

Binary Flags (10)

Col Data offset for Analog Channels Analogue Channel Scaling Factors Number of samples in Record Sample number when trigger occurred Relative to Real-Time conversion factor Timer Channel data (Packed data of [Record Length] ) Channel data - (Packed data of [Record Length] ) Channel data - (Packed data of [Record Length] ) Channel data - (Packed data of [Record Length] ) Channel data - (Packed data of [Record Length] ) Channel data - (Packed data of [Record Length] ) Channel data - (Packed data of [Record Length] ) Channel data - (Packed data of [Record Length] ) Channel data - (Packed data of [Record Length] ) Channel data - (Packed data of [Record Length] ) Channel data - (Packed data of [Record Length] )

Row

Menu Text

Data Type

Ind

Values

Cell Format String with default value

40

05

Channel Offset

Courier Reserved

40

06

Channel Scaling

Courier Reserved

40

10

Record Length

Signed Integer (16)

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

40

11

Trigger Position

Signed Integer (16)

40

12

Time Base

Courier Seconds

40

14

Upload Timer Channel

Unsigned Integer (16)

40

20

Upload Channel 1

Integer (16)

40

21

Upload Channel 2

Integer (16)

40

22

Upload Channel 3

Integer (16)

40

23

Upload Channel 4

Integer (16)

40

24

Upload Channel 5

Integer (16)

40

25

Upload Channel 6

Integer (16)

40

26

Upload Channel 7

Integer (16)

40

27

Upload Channel 8

Integer (16)

40

28

Upload Channel 9

Integer (16)

40

29

Upload Channel 10

Integer (16)

BF Menu Cell Data Menu Cell Data 0 1 Transfer Normal

00

COMMUNICATION SYSTEM DATA

BF

01

Disturbance Record Control Reference

BF

02

Disturbance Record Extraction Reference

BF

03

Setting Transfer

Indexed String

BF

04

Reset Demand Timers

Unsigned Integer(16)

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 80 of 160

BF

05

Reset Event Records

Unsigned Integer(16)

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 81 of 160

Section 3.
3.1

MODBUS SCADA INFORMATION

ModBus protocol The M300 implements a subset of the AEG Modicon ModBus RTU serial communications standard. ModBus is a single master multiple slave protocol suitable for a multi-drop configuration as provided by the RS485 connection. Up to 32 devices can be connected in this way.

3.2

Transactions Communication will operate on a master-slave basis where only one device (the master) can initiate transactions called Requests. The other devices (slaves) respond by supplying the requested data to the master. This is called the Request Response Cycle. Master to slave request Device address Device address Function Code Function Code nx8 bit data bytes nx8 bit data bytes Error check Error check Slave to master response

3.2.1

Request This master to slave transaction takes the form: Device address: master addressing a slave Function code Data bytes: eg. 03 asks the slave to read its registers and respond with their contents. tells the slave which register to start at and how many registers to read.

3.2.2

Response This slave to master transaction takes the form: Device address: to let the master know which slave is responding. Function code: Data bytes: this is an echo of the request function code. contains the data collected from the slave. 160 A 43 20 00 00 30466 & 30467

3.2.3

Request-response cycle example

a
Data type is 32 bit float Data held in ModBus addresses 3.2.3.1 Request frame

Starting Register Address 01 Function Code 03 HI LO 04 66

Register Count HI LO 00 02

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 82 of 160

3.2.3.2 Response frame Register Data Address 01 3.3 Framing There are two types of message framing for the serial communications, ASCII or RTU. The Measurement Centre will only support RTU framing. 3.3.1 RTU framing In RTU mode, messages start and end with a silent interval of at least 3.5 character times (t1-t2-t3-t4 as shown below). The advantage of this mode of framing is that it enables a greater character density and a better data throughput. However, each message must be transmitted in a continuous stream. If a silent interval of more than 1.5 character times occurs before completion of the frame, the device flushes the incomplete message and assumes that the next byte will be the address field of a new message.
Start t1-t2-t3-t4 Address 8 bits Function 8 bits Data n x 8 bits CRC Check 16 bits End t1-t2-t3-t4

Function Code 03

Byte Count 04

HI LO HI LO 43 20 00 00

The Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC) field is two bytes, containing a 16 bit binary value. The CRC value is calculated by the transmitting device, which appends the CRC to the message. The receiving device recalculates a CRC during receipt of the message, and compares the calculated value to the actual value it received in the CRC field. If the two values are not equal an error results. The CRC16 calculation is an industry standard method used for error detection. One frame is transmitted as 1 start bit, 8 data bits and 1 stop bits. If parity is selected then the frame is transmitted as 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit and 1 stop bit. Where n > 1 data is transmitted most significant byte first. The CRC check is transmitted least significant byte first. 3.4 Supported functions and usage
Code 03 04 06 16 07 08 Function to read from holding registers to read from input registers to write to a single holding register to write to one or more holding registers to read the exception status to test communications References (4XXXX memory references) (3XXXX memory references) (4XXXX memory references) (4XXXX memory references) (alarm status, exceptional error, OOS) (loop-back test)

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 83 of 160

3.5

Register map The ModBus register map consists of the following columns: Code, Address, Contents, Data type, Indicator, Values, Conditional, Register type, Min, Max., Step, Passcode.

3.5.1 3.5.2

Code Function codes as described above. Address 16 bit register address starting from zero. Most ModBus master devices add 40001 decimal to the actual address of the register.

3.5.3 3.5.4

Contents Description of parameters assigned to registers. Data type UNSIGNED INTEGER 32 BIT IEEE FLOAT range 0...65535 one 16 bit register range 1.2 x 10-38 to 3.4 x 1038 two consecutive 16 bit registers (most significant word occupies lowest addressed register) range 32...159 16 bit registers (two ASCII codes per register) Each bit of a 16 bit register can be used as a binary flag.

ASCII TEXT BINARY FLAGS 3.5.5 Indicator

Each bit of a 16 bit register can be either assigned as flags or filled with binary data. 3.5.6 3.5.7 3.5.8 Values Definitions of settings and data values. Conditional Lists any dependencies that exist between settings. Register type Declares whether a register is to be a read/write register (setting) or a read register (data). 3.5.9 3.5.10 Min, Max., Step The minimum and maximum numerical range and the incremental step size. Passcode There is a numerical passcode that allows save/abort settings and a factory accessible passcode constructed from the serial number that allows entry/exit to and from the calibration and configuration settings. 3.6 Error responses When a slave detects an error other than a CRC error, a response will be sent to the master. The most significant bit of the function code byte will be set to 1 (ie. the function code sent from the slave will be equal to the function code sent from the master plus 128). The following byte will be an exception code indicating the type of error that occurred.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 84 of 160

Transmissions received from the master with CRC errors will be ignored by the slave. The number of re-tries needs to be set in the master station software. An example of an illegal request and the corresponding exception response is shown below. The request in this example is to read registers 0201H to 0209H. If these addresses are not supported in the slave then the following occurs: 3.6.1 Request message Starting Register Address 01 3.6.2 Function Code 01 HI LO 02 01 Register Count HI LO 00 08 CRC 6D B4

Exception response message Address 01 Function Code 81 Exception Code 02 CRC C1 91

3.7

Exception codes
Code 01 Name ILLEGAL FUNCTION Meaning The function code transmitted is not one of the functions supported by the slave. 02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS The data address received in the request is not an allowable value for the slave 03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE The value referenced in the data field transmitted by the master is not within range for the selected data address 06 SLAVE DEVICE BUSY The slave is engaged in processing a long-duration program command. The master should re-transmit the message later when the slave is free

3.8 3.8.1

Event and disturbance record extraction procedures Event record extraction To read an event record, the user must first check that there are event records stored in the unit. Register-30035 indicates the total number of event records stored. The unit can store up to 100 event records. If there are event records, then set register 40571 to the record number of the record the user wants to read. The limits of this register are dependent on the number of records currently stored in the unit. Record number 0 always displays the latest record, and 1 the next previous record and so on. If there are no records stored then register 40571 is not available. After register 40571 has been set, the contents of the record are available in the following registers: Register 30036: Event type of the event. There are four types of event records.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 85 of 160

If the event type is 0 - Alarm event, then the following registers contain the record information: Register 30037: Time stamp Register 30043: Alarm type Note: Other registers not listed above within the range 30043 ... 30052 are not available. If the event type is 1-Setpoint event, then the following registers contain the record information: Register 30037: Time stamp Register 30046: Setpoint group Register 30047: Setpoint element Register 30046: Setpoint parameter Register 30049 /30050: Setpoint value when the setpoint exceeded alarm threshold. Register 30051: Setpoint level indicates whether the setpoint is operated on the high or low alarm. Register 30052: Setpoint trip/reset indicates whether the record is logged during the setpoint trip or reset operation. Note: Other registers not listed above within the range 30043 ... 30052 are not available. If the event type is 2-Output contact change, then the following registers contain the record information: Register 30044: The first 4 bits represent the status of the 4 relay outputs of the unit. Logical 1 means that the output has operated. However, it does not mean that the contact has closed or opened. The actual state of the contacts depends on the setting Relay # Default State. The unit logs this type of event only when the setting Relay # Assignment is set to Setpoint or Watchdog. Note: Other registers not listed above within the range 30043 ... 30052 are not available. If the event type is 3 - Opto input change, then the following registers contain the record information: Register 30045: The first 2 bits represent the status of the 2 opto inputs of the unit. Logical 1 means the opto is ON. The unit logs this type of events only when the setting Opto Input # Configuration is set to Logic Level. Note: Other registers not listed above within the range 30043 - 30052 are not available. 3.8.2 Disturbance record extraction To read a disturbance or a waveform analysis record, the user must first check that there are records available by reading the register 30054 which gives the total number of records stored in the unit. The unit can store 1 waveform analysis record and up to 4 disturbance records depending on the setting Record Configuration.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 86 of 160

Register 30054 gives the total number of records stored in the unit including both disturbance and waveform analysis records. Then set the register 40567 to determine the type of record you want to read. 0 is to read waveform analysis record, and 1 disturbance record. If the disturbance record is selected, the register 40568 must be set to select the record number. Record number 0 selects the latest, and 1 the previous one, and so on. Register 40568 is not available if the waveform analysis is selected because there is only one waveform analysis record. Registers 30055 ... 30067 Register 30055 ... 30060: Register 30061: contain information about the record to be extracted. Time stamp of the record Available channels. The unit can stored up to 10 channels of data. The total number of bits set indicates the number of channels stored in the record. Channel types. Indicates whether the valid channel shown in register 30061 is an analogue or digital channel. Total number of samples stored per channel. Number of samples of the selected page which is set via register 40570. Trigger position of the record. Time base. A scaling factor used to convert the samples of timer channel (channel 0) to a real time value in seconds. Individual scaling factor per analogue channel. It is used to multiply with the samples read from the corresponding analogue channel. Analogue channel names. Digital channel names.

Register 30062:

Register 30063: Register 30065: Register 30066: Register 30067:

Register 30068 to30081:

Register 30082 to 30151: Register 30152 to 30389:

The data of a record is extracted on a per channel basis. First select the channel to be read by setting register 40569 to the correct channel number. Channel number 0 is the timer channel which is excluded from bit value shown in register 30061, Available Channels (it is always there). Channel number 1 is bit-0 (right to left) shown in Available Channels and so on. Each channel of data is extracted on per page basis. The total number of pages of a selected channel is shown by register 30064. Each page can contain up to 64 samples of data. To read a page of data, first set register 40570 to the required page number, and from the value read back from register 30065 determine the number of samples available in the page. The availability of registers 30390 ... 30453 depends on the number of samples of the selected page. The information presented in the Disturbance/Waveform Analysis Menu is sufficient to construct a record based on the COMTRADE format (both COMTRADE: 1991 and COMTRADE: 1996 specifications are supported).

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 87 of 160

3.9

ModBus data types Registers defined in the ModBus database will define data as one of the data types described in the following table:
Type T1 Value /Bit Mask Description Unsigned Value Example: 12345 stored as 12345 T2 Unsigned Value, 1 decimal place Example: 1234.5 stored as 12345 T3 Unsigned Value, 2 decimal places Example: 123.45 stored as 12345 T4 Unsigned Value, 3 decimal places Example: 12.345 stored as 12345 T5 2s Compliment Signed Value Example: -12345 stored as -12345 T6 2s Compliment Signed Value, 1 decimal place Example: -1234.5 stored as -12345 T7 2s Compliment Signed Value, 2 decimal places Example: -123.45 stored as -12345 T8 2s Compliment Signed Value, 3 decimal places Example: -12.345 stored as -12345 T9 Unsigned Long Value (32 bits) High order word of long value stored in 1st 16 bits Low order word of long value stored in 2nd 16 bits Example: 1234567890 stored as 1234567890 T10 Unsigned Long Value, 2 decimal place (32 bits) High order word of long value stored in 1st 16 bits Low order word of long value stored in 2nd 16 bits Example: 12345678.90 stored as 1234567890 T11 Unsigned Long Value, 3 decimal place (32 bits) High order word of long value stored in 1st 16 bits Low order word of long value stored in 2nd 16 bits Example: 1234567.890 stored as 1234567890 T12 Unsigned Long Value, 4 decimal places (32 bits) High order word of long value stored in 1st 16 bits Low order word of long value stored in 2nd 16 bits Example: 123456.7890 stored as 1234567890

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 88 of 160

Type T13

Value /Bit Mask

Description Unsigned Long Value, 5 decimal place (32 bits) High order word of long value stored in 1st 16 bits Low order word of long value stored in 2nd 16 bits Example: 12345.67890 stored as 1234567890

T14

2s Compliment Signed Long Value (32 bits) High order word of long value stored in 1st 16 bits Low order word of long value stored in 2nd 16 bits Example: -1234567890 stored as -1234567890

T15

2s Compliment Signed Long Value, 2 decimal place (32 bits) High order word of long value stored in 1st 16 bits Low order word of long value stored in 2nd 16 bits Example: -12345678.90 stored as -1234567890

T16

2s Compliment Signed Long Value, 3 decimal place (32 bits) High order word of long value stored in 1st 16 bits Low order word of long value stored in 2nd 16 bits Example: -1234567.890 stored as -1234567890

T17

2s Compliment Signed Long Value, 4 decimal place (32 bits) High order word of long value stored in 1st 16 bits Low order word of long value stored in 2nd 16 bits Example: -123456.7890 stored as -1234567890

T18

2s Compliment Signed Long Value, 8 decimal place (32 bits) High order word of long value stored in 1st 16 bits Low order word of long value stored in 2nd 16 bits Example: -12.34567890 stored as -1234567890

T19 m7..m0 m15..m8 IV + I5..I0 H4..H0 W2..W0 + D4..D0 M3..M0 Y6..Y0

System Time and Date Milliseconds (0)

Minutes (0-59) + Invalid Time (80hex) Hours (0-23) Day of Week (1-7) + Day of month (1-31) Month of year (1-12) Year of century (00-99)

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 89 of 160


Value /Bit Mask Description Energy Register The format of this data register will depend on whether ModBus display mode is selected to show primary or secondary values. T9 for Primary values. Base unit kWh. T11 for Secondary values. Base unit Wh

Type T20

T21

Power Register The format of this data register will depend on whether ModBus Display Mode is selected to show primary or secondary values. T10 for Primary values. Base unit kW. T13 for Secondary values. Base unit W.

T22

Text String (14 characters) Two characters per 16 bit register.

T23

Text String (7 characters) Two characters per 16 bit register.

T24

Text String (6 characters) Two characters per 16 bit register.

T25

Text String (4 characters) Two characters per 16 bit register.

T26

Setpoint Parameter Written and read as a type T1, the data will also be validated according to current connection mode. Some setting values although within range and step size, may be invalid because the setpoint measurand is invisible.

T27

Output Parameter Written and read as a type T1, the data will also be validated according to current connection mode. Some setting values, although within range and step size, may be invalid because the output measurand is invisible.

T28

Output Current Setting Written and read as a type T1, the data will also be validated according to the output slope setting. Some setting values, although within data range and step size, may be invalid due to the current slope setting.

T29

User Password Data is written as a 4 character User password. Two characters per 16 bit register.

T30

Factory Password Data is written as a 6 character Factory password. Two characters per 16 bit register.

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 90 of 160


Value /Bit Mask Description Calibration Commands Write only data is written as T1 and interpreted as calibration commands.

Type T31

T32

Factory Commands Write only data is written as T1 and interpreted as factory commands.

T33

Operator Commands Write only data is written as T1 and interpreted as operator commands.

T34

Waveform Capture Commands Write only data is written as T1 and interpreted as waveform capture commands.

T35

Reset Commands Write only data is written as T1 and interpreted as reset commands.

T36

Event Record Index Data is written as T1 and a corresponding event record is obtained.

T37

Select Record Type A record is accessed via reading samples stored in each available channel, and the samples are accessed via the sample pages. Data is written as T1 and the sample data page is refreshed with sample registers according to the page function.

T38

Time Stamp Read only data indicating the system time at the occurrence of a particular event. m7..m0 m15..m8 IV + I5..I0 H4..H0 W2..W0 + D4..D0 M3..M0 Y6..Y0 Minutes (0-59) + Invalid Time (80hex) Hours (0-23) Day of Week (1-7) + Day of month (1-31) Month of year (1-12) Year of century (00-99) Voltage The read only voltage value indicated will depend on whether ModBus Display Mode is selected to show primary or secondary values. Data will be scaled by VT in Primary mode. Data will be formatted as T10 (Base unit volts) and T11 (Base unit volts) for the primary and secondary display modes respectively. Milliseconds (0-59990)

T39

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 91 of 160

Type T40

Value /Bit Mask

Description Current The read only current value indicated will depend on whether ModBus Display Mode is selected to show primary or secondary values. Data will be scaled by CT in primary mode. Data will be formatted as T10(Base unit amps) and T11 (Base unit amps) for the primary and secondary display modes respectively. Sample Page Register The read only sample page register will be determined, using other related settings as reference. The value will be read as T5. Disturbance Record Index This setting will cause a disturbance record to be represented in the Sample Page Registers. The value will be written and read as T1. Text String (20 characters) Two characters per 16 bit register. Number Of Event Records The read only value will be determined from the event recorder data. The value will be read as T1. Number Of Disturbance Records The read only value will be determined from the disturbance recorder data. The value will be read as T1. Disturbance Recorder Status The read only value will be determined from the disturbance recorder data. The value will be read as T1. Active Rate Registers The read only value will be determined from the rate register data. The value will be read as T1. Number of Samples in Sample Page The read only value will be determined from the currently selected disturbance record or waveform analysis data. The value will be read as T1. Disturbance Record Information The read only value will be determined from the current disturbance record information. The value will be read as T1. Disturbance Record Scaling Factors The read only value will be determined from the current disturbance record. The value will be read as T18. Disturbance Record Channel Names The read only value will be determined from the current disturbance record. The value will be read as T22.

T41

T42

T43 T44

T45

T46

T47

T48

T49

T50

T51

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 92 of 160

Type T52

Value /Bit Mask

Description Disturbance Record Trigger Time The read only value will be determined from the current disturbance record. The value will be read as T38. Time Into Period The read only value will be obtained from the Real Time Clock and Calendar. The value will be read as T1. Text String (15 characters) Two characters per 16 bit register. Disturbance Record Select Channel Number The total number of channels is determined by the bits set in Available Channels plus one timer channel. Settings are from 0 up to the (total number of channels -1). Channel number 0 is always the timer channel, and channel 1 is the first bit set in the Available Channels starting from left to right. The value will be written and read as T1.

T53

T54 T55

3.10
Data Ind Values / Dependencies Reg. Type Min Max Step Passcode

ModBus database map

Code

Address

Contents

30001 memory ref

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

SYSTEM DATA T54 T23 T22 T22 T1 1 2 3 T1 Bit-1 T1 Bit-1 Bit-2 Bit-3 T9 Bit-1 Bit-2 Bit-3 Bit-4 Bit-5 Bit-6 Bit-7 Bit-8 Bit-0 Relay 4 Status Watchdog Timeout Test Fail Comms Channel A Test 1 Fail Comms Channel A Test 2 Fail Comms Channel B Test 1 Fail Comms Channel B Test 2 Fail EEPROM Error: Immediate settings EEPROM Error: System Modes settings EEPROM Error: Disturbance Recorder settings EEPROM Error: Communications settings Data 0 Relay 3 Status Relay 2 Status Bit-0 Relay 1 Status Opto 2 Status Data 0 Bit-0 Opto 1 Status Basic + 4 Analogue Outputs + d.c. millivolt Input Basic + 4 Relay Outputs + 2 Opto Inputs + 4 Analogue Outputs + d.c. millivolt Input Data 0 Basic + 4 Relay Outputs + 2 Opto Inputs 0 Basic Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0

04

30001

30008

Model Number

04

30009

30012

Serial Number

04

30013

30019

Software Ref 1

04

30020

30026

Software Ref 2

04

30027

Fitted Hardware

04

30028

Opto Input Status

04

30029

Relay Output Status

04

30030

30031

Alarm Status

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 93 of 160

Code Bit-9 Bit-10 Bit-11 Bit-12 Bit-13 Bit-14 Bit-15 Bit-16 Bit-17 Bit-18 Bit-19 Bit-20 Bit-21 Bit-22 Bit-23 T9 Bit-1 Bit-2 Bit-3 Bit-4 Bit-5 Bit-6 Bit-7 Bit-8 Bit-9 Bit-10 Group 1 Setpoint 4 Group 1 Setpoint 5 Group 1 Setpoint 6 Group 1 Setpoint 7 Group 1 Setpoint 8 Group 2 Setpoint 1 Group 2 Setpoint 2 Group 2 Setpoint 3 Group 1 Setpoint 3 Group 1 Setpoint 2 Bit-0 Group 1 Setpoint 1 Analogue Output Serial Port Fail Data 0 Real Time Clock Is Inaccurate Real Time Clock Is Invalid EEPROM Error: LED Status EEPROM Error: Event Records EEPROM Error: Metering Data EEPROM Error: Tariff settings EEPROM Error: Alarm Group 4 settings EEPROM Error: Alarm Group 3 settings EEPROM Error: Alarm Group 2 settings EEPROM Error: Alarm Group 1 settings EEPROM Error: Opto Input settings EEPROM Error: Relay Output settings EEPROM Error: Analogue Output settings EEPROM Error: Demand settings

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

04

30032

30033

Setpoint Status

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 94 of 160

Code Bit-11 Bit-12 Bit-13 Bit-14 Bit-15 Bit-16 Bit-17 Bit-18 Bit-19 Bit-20 Bit-21 Bit-22 Bit-23 Bit-24 Bit-25 Bit-26 Bit-27 Bit-28 Bit-29 Bit-30 Bit-31 T1 Group 4 Setpoint 6 Group 4 Setpoint 7 Group 4 Setpoint 8 Data 0 Group 4 Setpoint 5 Group 4 Setpoint 4 Group 4 Setpoint 3 Group 4 Setpoint 2 Group 4 Setpoint 1 Group 3 Setpoint 8 Group 3 Setpoint 7 Group 3 Setpoint 6 Group 3 Setpoint 5 Group 3 Setpoint 4 Group 3 Setpoint 3 Group 3 Setpoint 2 Group 3 Setpoint 1 Group 2 Setpoint 8 Group 2 Setpoint 7 Group 2 Setpoint 6 Group 2 Setpoint 5 Group 2 Setpoint 4

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

04

30034

Active Access Level

EVENT RECORDS T44 1 1...100 Alarm Records Data 0

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 95 of 160

04

30035

Number of Event records

Code

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

Event T1 1 2 3 T38 T1 Comms Channel A Test 1 Fail Comms Channel A Test 2 Fail Comms Channel B Test 1 Fail Comms Channel B Test 2 Fail EEPROM Error: Immediate settings EEPROM Error: System Modes settings EEPROM Error: Disturbance Recorder settings EEPROM Error: Communications settings EEPROM Error: Demand settings EEPROM Error: Analogue Output settings EEPROM Error: Relay Output settings EEPROM Error: Opto Input settings EEPROM Error: Alarm Group 1 settings EEPROM Error: Alarm Group 2 settings EEPROM Error: Alarm Group 3 settings EEPROM Error: Alarm Group 4 settings EEPROM Error: Tariff settings EEPROM Error: Metering Data 19 EEPROM Error: Event Records 0 IEC format Data Opto input change 0 Watchdog Timeout Test Fail Data Output contact change Setpoint event 0 Alarm event Data 0

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

04

30036

Event Type

04

30037

30042

Calendar Clock Time Stamp

04 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

30043

Alarm Element Event (depends on Event Type)

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 96 of 160

Code 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 T1 2 4 8 T1 2 T1 2 3 4 1 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 1 Input 1 (bitmap) Input 2 (bitmap) Output 4 (bitmap) 0 Output 3 (bitmap) Output 2 (bitmap) 1 Output 1 (bitmap) Local Access Level 2 Set Data 0 Local Access Level 1 Set Local Access Level 0 Set Real Time Clock Set Exit Waveform Capture Mode Frequency Tracking Restored Enter Detailed Waveform Capture Mode Frequency Tracking Fail EEPROM Error: Calibration values EEPROM Error: Configuration settings Analogue Output Serial Port Fail Real Ttime Clock Inaccurate Real Time Clock Is Invalid EEPROM Error: LED Status

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

04

30044

Output Contact Change (depends on Event Type)

04

30045

Opto Input Change (depends on Event Type)

04

30046

Setpoint Group (depends on Event Type)

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 97 of 160

Data

Code T1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 T1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 IC IN IB IA Leading Total Var Demand Positive Total VA Demand Negative Total VA Demand Total Power Factor Demand Lagging Total Var Demand Export Total Watts Demand Import Total Watts Demand Total Power Factor Total 3 Phase Apparent Power Total 3 Phase Reactive Power Total 3 Phase Active Power Frequency 0 No Parameter Data Element 8 0 Element 7 Element 6 Element 5 Element 4 Element 3 Element 2 1 Element 1 Data 0

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

04

30047

Setpoint Element

04

30048

Setpoint Parameter

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 98 of 160

Code 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 T15 T1 1 T1 1 0 0 High Alarm Low Alarm Alarm Trip Alarm Reset Data 0 dc Input Data Data 0 0 Vnps VCA THD% VBC THD% VAB THD% VC THD% VB THD% VA THD% VCA VBC VAB VC VB VA Inps IC THD% IB THD% IA THD% IC Demand IB Demand IA Demand

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

04

30049

30050

Setpoint Value

04

30051

Setpoint Level

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 99 of 160

04

30052

Setpoint Trip / Reset

Code

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

DISTURBANCE RECORDS

AND WAVEFORM ANALYSIS T46 1 2 T45 Data Total number of disturbance records and waveform capture recdord stored Running Triggered 0 Stopped Data 0

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

04

30053

Disturbance Recorder Status

04

30054

Number of Disturbance & Waveform Capture Records

RECORD DATA T52 T49 Data Data Data Data T49 T49 T1 Number of sample pages of the Select Channel Number The number of samples of the Select Sample Page Number of samples stored in a channel. Bit set indicates channel is analogue, reset indicates channel is digital Bit set indicates channel is available (1=channel 1 ... 512=channel 10) Time and date stamp in IEC 870 format Data 0 0 0 0

04

30055

30060

Trigger Time

04

30061

Available Channels

04

30062

Channel Types

04

30063

Record Length

04

30064

Number of Sample Pages

04 T48 T49 T56

30065

Number of Samples in Sample Page

Data Data 0 Data 0

04

30066

Trigger Position

04

30067

Time Base

The scaling factor of the timer channel. It is 50ns.

Scaling Factors T50 T50

Scaling factor to scale values for each analogue channel Data Data 0 0

04

30068

30069

Analogue Channel 0

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 100 of 160

04

30070

30071

Analogue Channel 1

Code T50 T50 T50 T50 T50 Data Data 0 0 Data 0 Data 0 Data 0

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

04

30072

30073

Analogue Channel 2

04

30074

30075

Analogue Channel 3

04

30076

30077

Analogue Channel 4

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

04

30078

30079

Analogue Channel 5

04

30080

30081

Analogue Channel 6

Channel Names T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

04

30082

30088

Channel 1

04

30089

30095

Channel 2

04

30096

30102

Channel 3

04

30103

30109

Channel 4

04

30110

30116

Channel 5

04

30117

30123

Channel 6

04

30124

30130

Channel 7

04

30131

30137

Channel 8

04

30138

30144

Channel 9

04

30145

30151

Channel 10

Digital Channel Names T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

04

30152

30158

Digital Channel 0

04

30159

30165

Digital Channel 1

04

30166

30172

Digital Channel 2

04

30173

30179

Digital Channel 3

04

30180

30186

Digital Channel 4

04

30187

30193

Digital Channel 5

04

30194

30200

Digital Channel 6

04

30201

30207

Digital Channel 7

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 101 of 160

04

30208

30214

Digital Channel 8

04

30215

30221

Digital Channel 9

Code T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 T51 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Data 0 Data 0 Data 0

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

04

30222

30228

Digital Channel 10

04

30229

30235

Digital Channel 11

04

30236

30242

Digital Channel 12

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

04

30243

30249

Digital Channel 13

04

30250

30256

Digital Channel 14

04

30257

30263

Digital Channel 15

04

30264

30270

Digital Channel 16

04

30271

30277

Digital Channel 17

04

30278

30284

Digital Channel 18

04

30285

30291

Digital Channel 19

04

30292

30298

Digital Channel 20

04

30299

30305

Digital Channel 21

04

30306

30312

Digital Channel 22

04

30313

30319

Digital Channel 23

04

30320

30326

Digital Channel 24

04

30327

30333

Digital Channel 25

04

30334

30340

Digital Channel 26

04

30341

30347

Digital Channel 27

04

30348

30354

Digital Channel 28

04

30355

30361

Digital Channel 29

04

30362

30368

Digital Channel 30

04

30369

30375

Digital Channel 31

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 102 of 160

04

30376

30382

Digital Channel 32

Code T51 Data 0

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

04

30383

30389

Digital Channel 33

Sample Page T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 First disturbance sample of the Sample Page Data 0

04

30390

Disturbance Sample + 0

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

04

30391

Disturbance Sample + 1

04

30392

Disturbance Sample + 2

04

30393

Disturbance Sample + 3

04

30394

Disturbance Sample + 4

04

30395

Disturbance Sample + 5

04

30396

Disturbance Sample + 6

04

30397

Disturbance Sample + 7

04

30398

Disturbance Sample + 8

04

30399

Disturbance Sample + 9

04

30400

Disturbance Sample + 10

04

30401

Disturbance Sample + 11

04

30402

Disturbance Sample + 12

04

30403

Disturbance Sample + 13

04

30404

Disturbance Sample + 14

04

30405

Disturbance Sample + 15

04

30406

Disturbance Sample + 16

04

30407

Disturbance Sample + 17

04

30408

Disturbance Sample + 18

04

30409

Disturbance Sample + 19

04

30410

Disturbance Sample + 20

04

30411

Disturbance Sample + 21

04

30412

Disturbance Sample + 22

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 103 of 160

04

30413

Disturbance Sample + 23

Code T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Data 0 Data 0 Data 0

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

04

30414

Disturbance Sample + 24

04

30415

Disturbance Sample + 25

04

30416

Disturbance Sample + 26

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

04

30417

Disturbance Sample + 27

04

30418

Disturbance Sample + 28

04

30419

Disturbance Sample + 29

04

30420

Disturbance Sample + 30

04

30421

Disturbance Sample + 31

04

30422

Disturbance Sample + 32

04

30423

Disturbance Sample + 33

04

30424

Disturbance Sample + 34

04

30425

Disturbance Sample + 35

04

30426

Disturbance Sample + 36

04

30427

Disturbance Sample + 37

04

30428

Disturbance Sample + 38

04

30429

Disturbance Sample + 39

04

30430

Disturbance Sample + 40

04

30431

Disturbance Sample + 41

04

30432

Disturbance Sample + 42

04

30433

Disturbance Sample + 43

04

30434

Disturbance Sample + 44

04

30435

Disturbance Sample + 45

04

30436

Disturbance Sample + 46

04

30437

Disturbance Sample + 47

04

30438

Disturbance Sample + 48

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 104 of 160

04

30439

Disturbance Sample + 49

04

30440

Disturbance Sample + 50

Code T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 T41 Last Disturbance Sample of the Sample Page Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Data 0 Data 0 Data 0

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

04

30441

Disturbance Sample + 51

04

30442

Disturbance Sample + 52

04

30443

Disturbance Sample + 53

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

04

30444

Disturbance Sample + 54

04

30445

Disturbance Sample + 55

04

30446

Disturbance Sample + 56

04

30447

Disturbance Sample + 57

04

30448

Disturbance Sample + 58

04

30449

Disturbance Sample + 59

04

30450

Disturbance Sample + 60

04

30451

Disturbance Sample + 61

04

30452

Disturbance Sample + 62

04

30453

Disturbance Sample + 63

MEASUREMENTS T39 T39 T39 T39 T39 T39 T40 T40 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

04

30454

30455

VA

04

30456

30457

VB

04

30458

30459

VC

04

30460

30461

VAB

04

30462

30463

VBC

04

30464

30465

VCA

04

30466

30467

IA

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 105 of 160

04

30468

30469

IB

Code T40 T40 T11 T3 T9 T9 T3 T3 Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 Data 0 Data 0 Data 0

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

04

30470

30471

IC

04

30472

30473

IN

04

30474

30475

Frequency

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

04

30476

dc millivolt Input

04

30477

30478

Pulse Count Opto 1

04

30479

30480

Pulse Count Opto 2

04

30481

V %NPS

04

30482

I %NPS

POWER/ENERGY MEASUREMENTS T21 T21 T21 T21 T21 T21 T21 T21 T21 T21 T21 T21 T8 T20 T20 T20 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

04

30483

30484

A Phase Real Power

04

30485

30486

B Phase Real Power

04

30487

30488

C Phase Real Power

04

30489

30490

A Phase Reactive Power

04

30491

30492

B Phase Reactive Power

04

30493

30494

C Phase Reactive Power

04

30495

30496

A Phase Apparent Power

04

30497

30498

B Phase Apparent Power

04

30499

30500

C Phase Apparent Power

04

30501

30502

Total Real Power

04

30503

30504

Total Reactive Power

04

30505

30506

Total Apparent Power

04

30507

Total Power Factor

04

30508

30509

Import Real Energy (Wh)

04

30510

30511

Export Real Energy (Wh)

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 106 of 160

04

30512

30513

Import Reactive Energy (varh)

Code T20 Data 0

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

04

30514

30515

Export Reactive Energy (varh)

Demand Values

Dynamic Demand Values T53 T21 T21 T21 T21 T21 T21 T8 T40 T40 T40 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

04

30516

Time Into Period (minutes)

04

30517

30518

Import Real Power

04

30519

30520

Export Real Power

04

30521

30522

Lagging Reactive Power

04

30523

30524

Leading Reactive Power

04

30525

30526

Positive Apparent Power

04

30527

30528

Negative Apparent Power

04

30529

Power Factor

04

30530

30531

IA

04

30532

30533

IB

04

30534

30535

IC

Previous Period T21 T21 T21 T21 T21 T21 T8 T40 T40 T40 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

04

30536

30537

Import Real Power

04

30538

30539

Export Real Power

04

30540

30541

Lagging Reactive Power

04

30542

30543

Leading Reactive Power

04

30544

30545

Positive Apparent Power

04

30546

30547

Negative Apparent Power

04

30548

Power Factor

04

30549

30550

IA

04

30551

30552

IB

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 107 of 160

04

30553

30554

IC

Code

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

Max Demand Since Last Reset T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T40 T38 T40 T38 T40 T38 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Data 0 Data 0

04

30555

30556

Import Real Power

04

30557

30562

Time stamp

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

04

30563

30564

Export Real Power

04

30565

30570

Time stamp

04

30571

30572

Lagging Reactive Power

04

30573

30578

Time stamp

04

30579

30580

Leading Reactive Power

04

30581

30586

Time stamp

04

30587

30588

Positive Apparent Power

04

30589

30594

Time stamp

04

30595

30596

Negative Apparent Power

04

30597

30602

Time stamp

04

30603

30604

IA

04

30605

30610

Time stamp

04

30611

30612

IB

04

30613

30618

Time stamp

04

30619

30620

IC

04

30621

30626

Time stamp

Present Day Maximum Demand T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0

04

30627

30628

Import Real Power

04

30629

30634

Time stamp

04

30635

30636

Export Real Power

04

30637

30642

Time stamp

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 108 of 160

04

30643

30644

Lagging Reactive Power

Code T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T40 T38 T40 T38 T40 T38 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Data 0 Data 0 Data 0

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

04

30645

30650

Time stamp

04

30651

30652

Leading Reactive Power

04

30653

30658

Time stamp

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

04

30659

30660

Positive Apparent Power

04

30661

30666

Time stamp

04

30667

30668

Negative Apparent Power

04

30669

30674

Time stamp

04

30675

30676

IA

04

30677

30682

Time stamp

04

30683

30684

IB

04

30685

30690

Time stamp

04

30691

30692

IC

04

30693

30698

Time stamp

Day 1 Max Demand T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

04

30699

30700

Import Real Power

04

30701

30706

Time stamp

04

30707

30708

Export Real Power

04

30709

30714

Time stamp

04

30715

30716

Lagging Reactive Power

04

30717

30722

Time stamp

04

30723

30724

Leading Reactive Power

04

30725

30730

Time stamp

04

30731

30732

Positive Apparent Power

04

30733

30738

Time stamp

04

30739

30740

Negative Apparent Power

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 109 of 160

04

30741

30746

Time stamp

Code T40 T38 T40 T38 T40 T38 Data Data Data 0 0 0 Data 0 Data 0 Data 0

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

04

30747

30748

IA

04

30749

30754

Time stamp

04

30755

30756

IB

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

04

30757

30762

Time stamp

04

30763

30764

IC

04

30765

30770

Time stamp

Day 2 Max Demand T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T40 T38 T40 T38 T40 T38 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

04

30771

30772

Import Real Power

04

30773

30778

Time stamp

04

30779

30780

Export Real Power

04

30781

30786

Time stamp

04

30787

30788

Lagging Reactive Power

04

30789

30794

Time stamp

04

30795

30796

Leading Reactive Power

04

30797

30802

Time stamp

04

30803

30804

Positive Apparent Power

04

30805

30810

Time stamp

04

30811

30812

Negative Apparent Power

04

30813

30818

Time stamp

04

30819

30820

IA

04

30821

30826

Time stamp

04

30827

30828

IB

04

30829

30834

Time stamp

04

30835

30836

IC

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 110 of 160

04

30837

30842

Time stamp

Code

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

Day 3 Max Demand T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T40 T38 T40 T38 T40 T38 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Data 0 Data 0

04

30843

30844

Import Real Power

04

30845

30850

Time stamp

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

04

30851

30852

Export Real Power

04

30853

30858

Time stamp

04

30859

30860

Lagging Reactive Power

04

30861

30866

Time stamp

04

30867

30868

Leading Reactive Power

04

30869

30874

Time stamp

04

30875

30876

Positive Apparent Power

04

30877

30882

Time stamp

04

30883

30884

Negative Apparent Power

04

30885

30890

Time stamp

04

30891

30892

IA

04

30893

30898

Time stamp

04

30899

30900

IB

04

30901

30906

Time stamp

04

30907

30908

IC

04

30909

30914

Time stamp

Day 4 Max Demand T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0

04

30915

30916

Import Real Power

04

30917

30922

Time stamp

04

30923

30924

Export Real Power

04

30925

30930

Time stamp

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 111 of 160

04

30931

30932

Lagging Reactive Power

Code T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T40 T38 T40 T38 T40 T38 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Data 0 Data 0 Data 0

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

04

30933

30938

Time stamp

04

30939

30940

Leading Reactive Power

04

30941

30946

Time stamp

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

04

30947

30948

Positive Apparent Power

04

30949

30954

Time stamp

04

30955

30956

Negative Apparent Power

04

30957

30962

Time stamp

04

30963

30964

IA

04

30965

30970

Time stamp

04

30971

30972

IB

04

30973

30978

Time stamp

04

30979

30980

IC

04

30981

30986

Time stamp

Day 5 Max Demand T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

04

30987

30988

Import Real Power

04

30989

30994

Time stamp

04

30995

30996

Export Real Power

04

30997

31002

Time stamp

04

31003

31004

Lagging Reactive Power

04

31005

31010

Time stamp

04

31011

31012

Leading Reactive Power

04

31013

31018

Time stamp

04

31019

31020

Positive Apparent Power

04

31021

31026

Time stamp

04

31027

31028

Negative Apparent Power

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 112 of 160

04

31029

31034

Time stamp

Code T40 T38 T40 T38 T40 T38 Data Data Data 0 0 0 Data 0 Data 0 Data 0

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

04

31035

31036

IA

04

31037

31042

Time stamp

04

31043

31044

IB

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

04

31045

31050

Time stamp

04

31051

31052

IC

04

31053

31058

Time stamp

Day 6 Max Demand T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T40 T38 T40 T38 T40 T38 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

04

31059

31060

Import Real Power

04

31061

31066

Time stamp

04

31067

31068

Export Real Power

04

31069

31074

Time stamp

04

31075

31076

Lagging Reactive Power

04

31077

31082

Time stamp

04

31083

31084

Leading Reactive Power

04

31085

31090

Time stamp

04

31091

31092

Positive Apparent Power

04

31093

31098

Time stamp

04

31099

31100

Negative Apparent Power

04

31101

31106

Time stamp

04

31107

31108

IA

04

31109

31114

Time stamp

04

31115

31116

IB

04

31117

31122

Time stamp

04

31123

31124

IC

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 113 of 160

04

31125

31130

Time stamp

Code

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

Day 7 Max Demand T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T21 T38 T40 T38 T40 T38 T40 T38 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Data 0 Data 0

04

31131

31132

Import Real Power

04

31133

31138

Time stamp

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

04

31139

31140

Export Real Power

04

31141

31146

Time stamp

04

31147

31148

Lagging Reactive Power

04

31149

31154

Time stamp

04

31155

31156

Leading Reactive Power

04

31157

31162

Time stamp

04

31163

31164

Positive Apparent Power

04

31165

31170

Time stamp

04

31171

31172

Negative Apparent Power

04

31173

31178

Time stamp

04

31179

31180

IA

04

31181

31186

Time stamp

04

31187

31188

IB

04

31189

31194

Time stamp

04

31195

31196

IC

04

31197

31202

Time stamp

TARIFF RATE REGISTERS T47 Bit-0 Bit-1 Bit-2 Bit-3 0 No Rate Registers Active Rate Register 1 Active (bit-mask) Rate Register 2 Active (bit-mask) Rate Register 3 Active (bit-mask) Rate Register 4 Active (bit-mask) Data 0

04

31203

Currently Active Rate Registers

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 114 of 160

Code Bit-4 Bit-5 Bit-6 Bit-7 T1 Bit-0 Bit-1 Bit-2 Bit-3 T20 T20 T20 T20 T20 T20 T20 T20 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Number of switching events in season incorrectly specified 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Contains switch to an invalid season Duplicate season switching events Duplicate rate switching events 0 No Setting Conflicts Data Rate Register 8 Active (bit-mask) 0 Rate Register 7 Active (bit-mask) Rate Register 6 Active (bit-mask) Rate Register 5 Active (bit-mask)

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

04

31204

Tariff Setting Conflicts

04

31205

31206

Rate Register 1

04

31207

31208

Rate Register 2

04

31209

31210

Rate Register 3

04

31211

31212

Rate Register 4

04

31213

31214

Rate Register 5

04

31215

31216

Rate Register 6

04

31217

31218

Rate Register 7

04

31219

31220

Rate Register 8

THD HARMONIC DATA T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

04

31221

VA THD%

04

31222

VB THD%

04

31223

VC THD%

04

31224

VAB THD%

04

31225

VBC THD%

04

31226

VCA THD%

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 115 of 160

04

31227

IA THD%

04

31228

IB THD%

Code T3 Data 0

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

04

31229

IC THD%

PHASE VOLTAGE HARMONIC DATA

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

VA Harmonic Data T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

04

31230

VA Second Harmonic %

04

31231

VA Third Harmonic %

04

31232

VA Fourth Harmonic %

04

31233

VA Fifth Harmonic %

04

31234

VA Sixth Harmonic %

04

31235

VA Seventh Harmonic %

04

31236

VA Eigth Harmonic %

04

31237

VA Ninth Harmonic %

04

31238

VA Tenth Harmonic %

04

31239

VA Eleventh Harmonic %

04

31240

VA Twelfth Harmonic %

04

31241

VA Thirteenth Harmonic %

04

31242

VA Fourteenth Harmonic %

04

31243

VA Fifteenth Harmonic %

VB Harmonic Data T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0

04

31244

VB Second Harmonic %

04

31245

VB Third Harmonic %

04

31246

VB Fourth Harmonic %

04

31247

VB Fifth Harmonic %

04

31248

VB Sixth Harmonic %

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 116 of 160

04

31249

VB Seventh Harmonic %

Code T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 Data 0 Data 0 Data 0

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

04

31250

VB Eigth Harmonic %

04

31251

VB Ninth Harmonic %

04

31252

VB Tenth Harmonic %

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

04

31253

VB Eleventh Harmonic %

04

31254

VB Twelfth Harmonic %

04

31255

VB Thirteenth Harmonic %

04

31256

VB Fourteenth Harmonic %

04

31257

VB Fifteenth Harmonic %

VC Harmonic Data T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

04

31258

VC Second Harmonic %

04

31259

VC Third Harmonic %

04

31260

VC Fourth Harmonic %

04

31261

VC Fifth Harmonic %

04

31262

VC Sixth Harmonic %

04

31263

VC Seventh Harmonic %

04

31264

VC Eigth Harmonic %

04

31265

VC Ninth Harmonic %

04

31266

VC Tenth Harmonic %

04

31267

VC Eleventh Harmonic %

04

31268

VC Twelfth Harmonic %

04

31269

VC Thirteenth Harmonic %

04

31270

VC Fourteenth Harmonic %

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 117 of 160

04

31271

VC Fifteenth Harmonic %

Code

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

LINE VOLTAGE HARMONIC DATA

VAB Harmonic Data T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Data 0

04

31272

VAB Second Harmonic %

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

04

31273

VAB Third Harmonic %

04

31274

VAB Fourth Harmonic %

04

31275

VAB Fifth Harmonic %

04

31276

VAB Sixth Harmonic %

04

31277

VAB Seventh Harmonic %

04

31278

VAB Eigth Harmonic %

04

31279

VAB Ninth Harmonic %

04

31280

VAB Tenth Harmonic %

04

31281

VAB Eleventh Harmonic %

04

31282

VAB Twelfth Harmonic %

04

31283

VAB Thirteenth Harmonic %

04

31284

VAB Fourteenth Harmonic %

04

31285

VAB Fifteenth Harmonic %

VBC Harmonic Data T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

04

31286

VBC Second Harmonic %

04

31287

VBC Third Harmonic %

04

31288

VBC Fourth Harmonic %

04

31289

VBC Fifth Harmonic %

04

31290

VBC Sixth Harmonic %

04

31291

VBC Seventh Harmonic %

04

31292

VBC Eigth Harmonic %

04

31293

VBC Ninth Harmonic %

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 118 of 160

04

31294

VBC Tenth Harmonic %

Code T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 Data Data 0 0 Data 0 Data 0 Data 0

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

04

31295

VBC Eleventh Harmonic %

04

31296

VBC Twelfth Harmonic %

04

31297

VBC Thirteenth Harmonic %

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

04

31298

VBC Fourteenth Harmonic %

04

31299

VBC Fifteenth Harmonic %

VCA Harmonic Data T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

04

31300

VCA Second Harmonic %

04

31301

VCA Third Harmonic %

04

31302

VCA Fourth Harmonic %

04

31303

VCA Fifth Harmonic %

04

31304

VCA Sixth Harmonic %

04

31305

VCA Seventh Harmonic %

04

31306

VCA Eigth Harmonic %

04

31307

VCA Ninth Harmonic %

04

31308

VCA Tenth Harmonic %

04

31309

VCA Eleventh Harmonic %

04

31310

VCA Twelfth Harmonic %

04

31311

VCA Thirteenth Harmonic %

04

31312

VCA Fourteenth Harmonic %

04

31313

VCA Fifteenth Harmonic %

PHASE CURRENT HARMONIC DATA

IA Harmonic Data T3 T3 Data Data 0 0

04

31314

IA Second Harmonic %

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 119 of 160

04

31315

IA Third Harmonic %

Code T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Data 0 Data 0 Data 0

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

04

31316

IA Fourth Harmonic %

04

31317

IA Fifth Harmonic %

04

31318

IA Sixth Harmonic %

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

04

31319

IA Seventh Harmonic %

04

31320

IA Eigth Harmonic %

04

31321

IA Ninth Harmonic %

04

31322

IA Tenth Harmonic %

04

31323

IA Eleventh Harmonic %

04

31324

IA Twelfth Harmonic %

04

31325

IA Thirteenth Harmonic %

04

31326

IA Fourteenth Harmonic %

04

31327

IA Fifteenth Harmonic %

IB Harmonic Data T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

04

31328

IB Second Harmonic %

04

31329

IB Third Harmonic %

04

31330

IB Fourth Harmonic %

04

31331

IB Fifth Harmonic %

04

31332

IB Sixth Harmonic %

04

31333

IB Seventh Harmonic %

04

31334

IB Eigth Harmonic %

04

31335

IB Ninth Harmonic %

04

31336

IB Tenth Harmonic %

04

31337

IB Eleventh Harmonic %

04

31338

IB Twelfth Harmonic %

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 120 of 160

04

31339

IB Thirteenth Harmonic %

Code T3 T3 Data 0 Data 0

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

04

31340

IB Fourteenth Harmonic %

04

31341

IB Fifteenth Harmonic %

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

IC Harmonic Data T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

04

31342

IC Second Harmonic %

04

31343

IC Third Harmonic %

04

31344

IC Fourth Harmonic %

04

31345

IC Fifth Harmonic %

04

31346

IC Sixth Harmonic %

04

31347

IC Seventh Harmonic %

04

31348

IC Eigth Harmonic %

04

31349

IC Ninth Harmonic %

04

31350

IC Tenth Harmonic %

04

31351

IC Eleventh Harmonic %

04

31352

IC Twelfth Harmonic %

04

31353

IC Thirteenth Harmonic %

04

31354

IC Fourteenth Harmonic %

04

31355

IC Fifteenth Harmonic %

INTERNAL FACTORY DATA

SYSTEM TIME STAMPS T38 T38 Time and date stamp in IEC 870 format Time and date stamp in IEC 870 format Data Data 0 0

04

32001

32006

Configuration Time Stamp

04

32007

32012

Calibration Time Stamp

CALIBRATION COEFFICIENT T18 T18 Data Data 0 0

04

32013

32014

Va Calibration Coefficient

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 121 of 160

04

32015

32016

Ia Calibration Coefficient

Code T18 T18 T18 T18 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Data 0 Data 0 Data 0

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

04

32017

32018

Vb Calibration Coefficient

04

32019

32020

Ib Calibration Coefficient

04

32021

32022

Vc Calibration Coefficient

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

04

32023

32024

Ic Calibration Coefficient

04 T18

32025

32026

Va Temperature Compensation T18

04

32027

32028

Ia Temperature Compensation

04 T18

32029

32030

Vb Temperature Compensation T18

04

32031

32032

Ib Temperature Compensation

04 T18

32033

32034

Vc Temperature Compensation T18

04

32035

32036

Ic Temperature Compensation

04

32037

32038

Analogue Output 1 Coefficient T18

04

32039

32040

Analogue Output 2 Coefficient T18

04

32041

32042

Analogue Output 3 Coefficient T18

04 T18 T18 T18

32043

32044

Analogue Output 4 Coefficient T18

04

32045

32046

DC Millivolt Input Offset Coefficient

04

32047

32048

DC Millivolt Input Full Scale Coefficient

04

32049

32050

DC Millivolt Input Temperature Compensation

SYSTEM DATA T1 1 2 0 English Francais Deutsch Setting 0 3 1 2

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 122 of 160

03,06,16

40001

Language

Code 3 T29 T43 T43 T1 1 2 T25 T25 Setting 41h Setting 41h 5Ah 5Ah Full access up to level 2 user password 1 1 2 2 Full access up to level 1 user password 0 Menu is fully protected Setting 0 2 1 Setting 20h 7Eh 1 2 2 Setting 20h 7Eh 1 2 Password to attempt user access level upgrade Setting 41h 5Ah 1 0 Espanol

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

03,06,16

40002

40003

User Password

03,06,16

40004

40013

Description

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

40014

40023

Plant Reference

03,06,16

40024

Password Control

03,06,16

40025

40026

Level 1 - User Password

03,06,16

40027

40028

Level 2 - User Password

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION T1 1 T1 1 T1 1 On 0 Off Primary Setting 0 1 1 2 0 Secondary Modbus/RS232 & Courier/KBUS Setting 0 1 1 2 0 Courier/IEC870 & Modbus/RS485 Setting 0 1 1 2

03,06,16

40029

Communication Protocols

03,06,16

40030

Modbus Display Mode

03,06,16

40031

LCD Back Light

Clock and Calendar T19 IEC 870 Time/Date format Setting

03,06,16

40032

40037

Time and Date

03,06,16 1 2 3 4 5

40038

Clock Synchronisation

T1

External synchronisation disabled Synchronise time to nearest 30 second boundary Synchronise time to nearest 1 minute boundary Synchronise time to nearest 5 minute boundary Synchronise time to nearest 10 minute boundary Synchronise time to nearest 15 minute boundary

Setting

60

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 123 of 160

Code 6 7 Synchronise time to nearest 60 minute boundary Option disabled Setting 0 31 1 2 Synchronise time to nearest 30 minute boundary

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

03,06,16 T1 1 .. 31 Number of days allowed between time synchronisation events 0

40039

Maximum Clock Synchronisation Interval

SYSTEM MODES T1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 T1 1 2 3 Mode 4 Mode 3 Mode 2 0 Mode 1 3 phase 4 wire unbalanced (2 volts, 3 currents) 3 phase 4 wire unbalanced (3 volts, 3 currents) 2 phase 3 wire system (2 volts, 2 currents) 3 phase 3 wire balanced (2 volts, 2 currents) Setting 0 3 1 2 3 phase 3 wire unbalanced (3 volts, 2 currents) 3 phase 3 wire balanced (3 volts, 1 current) 3 phase 4 wire balanced (1 volts, 1 current) 0 Single Phase (L, N) Setting 0 7 1 2

03,06,16

40040

Connection Mode

03,06,16

40041

Power Flow Mode

03,06,16 T4 T9 T3

40042

CT Primary

T1

Amps Amps

Setting Setting Setting Setting

0 1000 0 100

9999 9000

1 1 999999 50000 1

2 2 1 2 2

03,06,16

40043

CT Secondary

03,06,16

40044

40045

VT Primary

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 124 of 160

03,06,16

40046

VT Secondary

Code

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

SYSTEM COMMANDS T35 Bit-1 Bit-2 Bit-3 Bit-4 Bit-5 Bit-6 Bit-7 T33 2 Abort Settings 1 Save Settings Setting 1 Reset Disturbance Records 2 2 Reset Event Records Restore Password Protection Reset Local LEDs Reset Pulse Counts Reset Energy Meter and Demand Reset Demand Bit-0 Reset Energy Meter Setting 1 255 1

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

40047

Reset Command Register

03,06,16

40048

Operator Command Register

COMMUNICATION SETTINGS T1 1 Enabled 0 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2

03,06,16

40049

Modem Control Lines

Courier T1 T1 1 T1 1 2 3 4 4800 baud 9600 baud 19200 baud 2400 baud 0 1200 baud 10 bits Setting 0 4 1 2 0 FT1.2, 11 bits Setting Setting 0 0 255 1 1 1 2 2

03,06,16

40050

Courier Address

03,06,16

40051

IEC870 Frame

03,06,16

40052

Baud Rate

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 125 of 160

Code

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

Modbus T1 T1 1 2 3 4 T1 1 2 1 start bit, 8 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bits 1 start bit, 8 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bits 0 1 start bit, 8 data bits, no parity, 2 stop bits Setting 0 2 19200 baud 1 2 9600 baud 4800 baud 2400 baud 0 1200 baud Setting 0 4 1 2 Setting 1 247 1 2

03,06,16

40053

Modbus Address

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

40054

Baud Rate

03,06,16

40055

Framing

DEMAND CALCULATION T1 1 2 T1 T1 T1 Thermal characteristic demand calculation Duration of sub-period specified in minutes Number of Sub-Intervals in a Demand Period Duration of period specified in minutes (when not Sliding Window) Setting Setting Setting 1 1 1 99 15 99 1 1 1 2 2 2 Sliding window demand calculation 0 Fixed window demand calculation Setting 0 2 1 2

03,06,16

40056

Demand function

03,06,16

40057

Demand Sub-Period Sliding Window

03,06,16

40058

Demand Period Sliding

03,06,16

40059

Demand Period Fixed

ANALOGUE OUTPUTS

Output 1 T27 1 0 No Parameter Frequency Setting 0 15 1 2

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 126 of 160

03,06,16

40060

Output 1 Parameter

Code 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 T2 T1 1 T2 T2 T28 1 2 3 4 5 0 0 ...10 mA Uni-directional input 0 ... 20 mA Uni-directional input 4 ... 20 mA Uni-directional input 0 ... 10 mA Bi-directional input 0 ... 20 mA Bi-directional input 4 ... 20 mA Bi-directional input Dual Slope Setting Setting Setting 0 0 0 1000 1000 5 1 1 1 2 2 2 0 Single Slope VCA Setting Setting 0 1 1 2 2 VBC VAB VC VB VA IN IC IB IA Total Power Factor Total Apparent Power Total Reactive Power Total Real Power

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

40061

Output 1 Full Scale %

03,06,16

40062

Output 1 Slope Setting

03,06,16

40063

Output 1 X Breakpoint %

03,06,16

40064

Output 1 Y Breakpoint %

03,06,16

40065

Output 1 Current Output

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 127 of 160

Code

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

Output 2 T27 T2 T1 T2 T2 T28 see Output 1 Setting 0 5 1 see Output 1 Setting 0 1000 1 see Output 1 Setting 0 1000 1 see Output 1 Setting 0 1 1 2 2 2 2 see Output 1 Setting 0 2000 1 2 see Output 1 Setting 0 15 1 2

03,06,16

40066

Output 2 Parameter

03,06,16

40067

Output 2 Full Scale %

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

40068

Output 2 Slope Setting

03,06,16

40069

Output 2 X Breakpoint %

03,06,16

40070

Output 2 Y Breakpoint %

03,06,16

40071

Output 2 Current Output

Output 3 T27 T2 T1 T2 T2 T28 see Output 1 see Output 1 see Output 1 Setting Setting Setting see Output 1 Setting see Output 1 Setting 0 0 0 0 0 see Output 1 Setting 0 15 2000 1 1000 1000 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2

03,06,16

40072

Output 3 Parameter

03,06,16

40073

Output 3 Full Scale %

03,06,16

40074

Output 3 Slope Setting

03,06,16

40075

Output 3 X Breakpoint %

03,06,16

40076

Output 3 Y Breakpoint %

03,06,16

40077

Output 3 Current Output

Output 4 T27 T2 T1 T2 T2 T28 see Output 1 see Output 1 see Output 1 see Output 1 see Output 1 see Output 1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 2000 1 1000 1000 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2

03,06,16

40078

Output 4 Parameter

03,06,16

40079

Output 4 Full Scale %

03,06,16

40080

Output 4 Slope Setting

03,06,16

40081

Output 4 X Breakpoint %

03,06,16

40082

Output 4 Y Breakpoint %

03,06,16

40083

Output 4 Current Output

RELAY OUTPUTS T1 1 2 0 Disabled Setpoint 1 Setpoint 2 Setting 0 9 1 2

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 128 of 160

03,06,16

40084

Relay 1 Assignment

Code 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 T1 T1 T1 T1 1 T1 T1 T1 T22 T22 T22 T22 see Relay 1 Default State see Relay 1 Default State see Relay 1 Default State Normally Closed Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0 0 20h 20h 20h 20h 1 1 1 7Eh 7Eh 7Eh 7Eh 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 Normally Open Setting see Relay 1 Assignment Setting 0 0 see Relay 1 Assignment Setting 0 see Relay 1 Assignment Setting 0 9 9 9 1 Watchdog 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 Pulsed Export kVArh Pulsed Import kVArh Pulsed Export kWh Pulsed Import kWh Setpoint 4 Setpoint 3

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

40085

Relay 2 Assignment

03,06,16

40086

Relay 3 Assignment

03,06,16

40087

Relay 4 Assignment

03,06,16

40088

Relay 1 Default State

03,06,16

40089

Relay 2 Default State

03,06,16

40090

Relay 3 Default State

03,06,16

40091

Relay 4 Default State

03,06,16

40092

40098

Relay 1 Label

03,06,16

40099

40105

Relay 2 Label

03,06,16

40106

40112

Relay 3 Label

03,06,16

40113

40119

Relay 4 Label

PULSED OUTPUT SETTINGS

Import Watts T1 1 2 0 100ms 200ms 400ms Setting 0 2 1 2

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 129 of 160

03,06,16

40120

Import Watts Pulse Duration

Code T1 Setting Setting 10 2000 1 2 1 4000 1 2 T2 See notes 5,6 60008.1210.060 for dependence of Full Scale See notes 5,6 60008.1210.060 for dependence of Pulse Rate

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

03,06,16

40121

Import Watts Pulse Rate

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

40122

Import Watts Full Scale

Export Watts T1 T1 T2 see Import Watts Setting 10 see Import Watts Setting 1 4000 2000 see Import Watts Setting 0 2 1 1 1 2 2 2

03,06,16

40123

Export Watts Pulse Duration

03,06,16

40124

Export Watts Pulse Rate

03,06,16

40125

Export Watts Full Scale

Import vars T1 T1 T2 see Import Watts see Import Watts Setting Setting see Import Watts Setting 0 1 10 2 4000 2000 1 1 1 2 2 2

03,06,16

40126

Import vars Pulse Duration

03,06,16

40127

Import vars Pulse Rate

03,06,16

40128

Import vars Full Scale

Export vars T1 T1 T2 see Import Watts see Import Watts see Import Watts Setting Setting Setting 0 1 10 2 4000 2000 1 1 1 2 2 2

03,06,16

40129

Export vars Pulse Duration

03,06,16

40130

Export vars Pulse Rate

03,06,16

40131

Export vars Full Scale

OPTO INPUTS T1 1 2 3 4 5 0 Opto Input Disabled Demand Synchronisation Energy Synchronisation Energy & Demand Synchronisation Pulse Counter Clock And Calendar Synchronisation Setting 0 6 1 2

03,06,16

40132

Opto Input 1 Configuration

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 130 of 160

Code 6 T22 T1 T22 Setting 20h 7Eh 1 2 See Opto Input 1 Configuration Setting 0 6 1 2 Setting 20h 7Eh 1 2 Logic Level

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

03,06,16

40133

40139

Opto Input 1 Label

03,06,16

40140

Opto Input 2 Configuration

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

40141

40147

Opto Input 2 Label

SETPOINT SETTINGS

Setpoint 1 T1 Setting 1 60 1 2

03,06,16

40148

Setpoint 1 Delay On/Off

Element 1 T26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 IA IB IC IN Lagging Total Var Demand Leading Total Var Demand Positive Total VA Demand Negative Total VA Demand Total Power Factor Demand Export Total Watts Demand Import Total Watts Demand Total Power Factor Total 3 Phase Apparent Power Total 3 Phase Reactive Power Total 3 Phase Active Power Frequency 0 No Parameter Setting 0 37 1 2

03,06,16

40149

Setpoint 1 First Setpoint Parameter

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 131 of 160

Code 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 T6 T6 dc Input (lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set; (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; Setting Setting 2 2 Vnps VCA THD% VBC THD% VAB THD% VC THD% VB THD% VA THD% VCA VBC VAB VC VB VA Inps IC THD% IB THD% IA THD% IC Demand IB Demand IA Demand

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

40150

Setpoint 1 First Hi Setpoint Level %

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 132 of 160

03,06,16

40151

Setpoint 1 First Lo Setpoint Level %

Code

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

Element 2 T26 T6 T6 (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; Setting (lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set; Setting 2 2 see Setpoint 1 Element 1 Setting 0 37 1 2

03,06,16

40152

Setpoint 1 Second Setpoint Parameter Group

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

40153

Setpoint 1 Second Hi Setpoint Level %

03,06,16

40154

Setpoint 1 Second Lo Setpoint Level %

Element 3 T26 T6 T6 (lower limit of High Set depends on lower limit of High Set; Setting (lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set; Setting see Setpoint 1 Element 1 Setting 0 37 1 2 2 2

03,06,16

40155

Setpoint 1 Third Setpoint Parameter Group

03,06,16

40156

Setpoint 1 Third Hi Setpoint Level %

03,06,16

40157

Setpoint 1 Third Lo Setpoint Level %

Element 4 T26 T6 T6 (lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set; (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; see Setpoint 1 Element 1 Setting Setting Setting 0 37 1 2 2 2

03,06,16

40158

Setpoint 1 Fourth Setpoint Parameter Group

03,06,16

40159

Setpoint 1 Fourth Hi Setpoint Level %

03,06,16

40160

Setpoint 1 Fourth Lo Setpoint Level %

Element 5 T26 T6 T6 see Setpoint 1 Element 1 (lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set; (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; Setting Setting Setting 0 37 1 2 2 2

03,06,16

40161

Setpoint 1 Fifth Setpoint Parameter Group

03,06,16

40162

Setpoint 1 Fifth Hi Setpoint Level %

03,06,16

40163

Setpoint 1 Fifth Lo Setpoint Level %

Element 6 T26 see Setpoint 1 Element 1 Setting 0 37 1 2

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 133 of 160

03,06,16

40164

Setpoint 1 Sixth Setpoint Parameter Group

Code

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type Min

Max

Step

Passcode

03,06,16 T6 T6 (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; Setting 2 Setting 2

40165

Setpoint 1 Sixth Hi Setpoint Level %

(lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set;

03,06,16

40166

Setpoint 1 Sixth Lo Setpoint Level %

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Element 7 T26 T6 T6 (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; Setting (lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set; Setting see Setpoint 1 Element 1 Setting 0 37 1 2 2 2

03,06,16

40167

Setpoint 1 Seventh Setpoint Parameter Group

03,06,16

40168

Setpoint 1 Seventh Hi Setpoint Level %

03,06,16

40169

Setpoint 1 Seventh Lo Setpoint Level %

Element 8 T26 T6 T6 (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; (lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set; see Setpoint 1 Element 1 Setting Setting Setting 0 37 1 2 2 2

03,06,16

40170

Setpoint 1 Eighth Setpoint Parameter Group

03,06,16

40171

Setpoint 1 Eighth Hi Setpoint Level %

03,06,16

40172

Setpoint 1 Eighth Lo Setpoint Level %

Setpoint 2 T1 Setting 1 60 1 2

03,06,16

40173

Setpoint 2 Delay On/Off

Element 1 T26 T6 T6 see Setpoint 1 Element 1 (lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set; (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; Setting Setting Setting 0 37 1 2 2 2

03,06,16

40174

Setpoint 2 First Setpoint Parameter

03,06,16

40175

Setpoint 2 First Hi Setpoint Level %

03,06,16

40176

Setpoint 2 First Lo Setpoint Level %

Element 2 T26 see Setpoint 1 Element 1 Setting 0 37 1 2

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 134 of 160

03,06,16

40177

Setpoint 2 Second Setpoint Parameter Group

Code

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

03,06,16 T6 T6 upper limit of Low Set depends on (lower limit of High Set; Setting 2 Setting 2

40178

Setpoint 2 Second Hi Setpoint Level %

lower limit of High Set depends on (upper limit of Low Set;

03,06,16

40179

Setpoint 2 Second Lo Setpoint Level %

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Element 3 T26 see Setpoint 1 Element 1 Setting 0 37 1 2

03,06,16

40180

Setpoint 2 Third Setpoint Parameter Group

Code T6 T6 (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; Setting (lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set; Setting -

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type Min

Max -

Step -

Passcode 2 2

03,06,16

40181

Setpoint 2 Third Hi Setpoint Level %

03,06,16

40182

Setpoint 2 Third Lo Setpoint Level %

Element 4 T26 T6 T6 (lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set; (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; see Setpoint 1 Element 1 Setting Setting Setting 0 37 1 2 2 2

03,06,16

40183

Setpoint 2 Fourth Setpoint Parameter Group

03,06,16

40184

Setpoint 2 Fourth Hi Setpoint Level %

03,06,16

40185

Setpoint 2 Fourth Lo Setpoint Level %

Element 5 T26 T6 T6 see Setpoint 1 Element 1 (lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set; (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; Setting Setting Setting 0 37 1 2 2 2

03,06,16

40186

Setpoint 2 Fifth Setpoint Parameter Group

03,06,16

40187

Setpoint 2 Fifth Hi Setpoint Level %

03,06,16

40188

Setpoint 2 Fifth Lo Setpoint Level %

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 135 of 160

Element 6

Code

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

03,06,16 T26 T6 T6 (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; Setting 2 (lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set; Setting 2 see Setpoint 1 Element 1 Setting 0 37 1 2

40189

Setpoint 2 Sixth Setpoint Parameter Group

03,06,16

40190

Setpoint 2 Sixth Hi Setpoint Level %

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

40191

Setpoint 2 Sixth Lo Setpoint Level %

Element 7 T26 T6 T6 (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; Setting (lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set; Setting see Setpoint 1 Element 1 Setting 0 37 1 2 2 2

03,06,16

40192

Setpoint 2 Seventh Setpoint Parameter Group

03,06,16

40193

Setpoint 2 Seventh Hi Setpoint Level %

03,06,16

40194

Setpoint 2 Seventh Lo Setpoint Level %

Element 8 T26 T6 T6 (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; (lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set; see Setpoint 1 Element 1 Setting Setting Setting 0 37 1 2 2 2

03,06,16

40195

Setpoint 2 Eighth Setpoint Parameter Group

03,06,16

40196

Setpoint 2 Eighth Hi Setpoint Level %

03,06,16

40197

Setpoint 2 Eighth Lo Setpoint Level %

Setpoint 3 T1 Setting 0 60 1 2

03,06,16

40198

Setpoint 3 Delay On/Off

Element 1 T26 T6 T6 see Setpoint 1 Element 1 (lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set; (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; Setting Setting Setting 0 37 1 2 2 2

03,06,16

40199

Setpoint 3 First Setpoint Parameter

03,06,16

40200

Setpoint 3 First Hi Setpoint Level %

03,06,16

40201

Setpoint 3 First Lo Setpoint Level %

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 136 of 160

Element 2

Code

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

03,06,16 T26 T6 T6 (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; Setting 2 (lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set; Setting 2 see Setpoint 1 Element 1 Setting 0 37 1 2

40202

Setpoint 3 Second Setpoint Parameter Group

03,06,16

40203

Setpoint 3 Second Hi Setpoint Level %

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

40204

Setpoint 3 Second Lo Setpoint Level %

Element 3 T26 T6 T6 (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; Setting lower limit of High Set depends on (upper limit of Low Set; Setting see Setpoint 1 Element 1 Setting 0 37 1 2 2 2

03,06,16

40205

Setpoint 3 Third Setpoint Parameter Group

03,06,16

40206

Setpoint 3 Third Hi Setpoint Level %

03,06,16

40207

Setpoint 3 Third Lo Setpoint Level %

Element 4 T26 T6 T6 (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; (lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set; see Setpoint 1 Element 1 Setting Setting Setting 0 37 1 2 2 2

03,06,16

40208

Setpoint 3 Fourth Setpoint Parameter Group

03,06,16

40209

Setpoint 3 Fourth Hi Setpoint Level %

03,06,16

40210

Setpoint 3 Fourth Lo Setpoint Level %

Element 5 T26 T6 T6 see Setpoint 1 Element 1 (lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set; (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; Setting Setting Setting 0 37 1 2 2 2

03,06,16

40211

Setpoint 3 Fifth Setpoint Parameter Group

03,06,16

40212

Setpoint 3 Fifth Hi Setpoint Level %

03,06,16

40213

Setpoint 3 Fifth Lo Setpoint Level %

Element 6 T26 see Setpoint 1 Element 1 Setting 0 37 1 2

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 137 of 160

03,06,16

40214

Setpoint 3 Sixth Setpoint Parameter Group

Code

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

03,06,16 T6 T6 (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; Setting 2 Setting 2

40215

Setpoint 3 Sixth Hi Setpoint Level %

(lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set;

03,06,16

40216

Setpoint 3 Sixth Lo Setpoint Level %

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Element 7 T26 T6 T6 (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; Setting (lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set; Setting see Setpoint 1 Element 1 Setting 0 37 1 2 2 2

03,06,16

40217

Setpoint 3 Seventh Setpoint Parameter Group

03,06,16

40218

Setpoint 3 Seventh Hi Setpoint Level %

03,06,16

40219

Setpoint 3 Seventh Lo Setpoint Level %

Element 8 T26 T6 T6 (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; (lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set; see Setpoint 1 Element 1 Setting Setting Setting 0 37 1 2 2 2

03,06,16

40220

Setpoint 3 Eighth Setpoint Parameter Group

03,06,16

40221

Setpoint 3 Eighth Hi Setpoint Level %

03,06,16

40222

Setpoint 3 Eighth Lo Setpoint Level %

Setpoint 4 T1 Setting 1 60 1 2

03,06,16

40223

Setpoint 4 Delay On/Off

Element 1 T26 T6 T6 see Setpoint 1 Element 1 (lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set; (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; Setting Setting Setting 0 37 1 2 2 2

03,06,16

40224

Setpoint 4 First Setpoint Parameter

03,06,16

40225

Setpoint 4 First Hi Setpoint Level %

03,06,16

40226

Setpoint 4 First Lo Setpoint Level %

Element 2 T26 see Setpoint 1 Element 1 Setting 0 37 1 2

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 138 of 160

03,06,16

40227

Setpoint 4 Second Setpoint Parameter Group

Code

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

03,06,16 T6 T6 (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; Setting 2 Setting 2

40228

Setpoint 4 Second Hi Setpoint Level %

(lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set;

03,06,16

40229

Setpoint 4 Second Lo Setpoint Level %

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Element 3 T26 T6 T6 (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; Setting (lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set; Setting see Setpoint 1 Element 1 Setting 0 37 1 2 2 2

03,06,16

40230

Setpoint 4 Third Setpoint Parameter Group

03,06,16

40231

Setpoint 4 Third Hi Setpoint Level %

03,06,16

40232

Setpoint 4 Third Lo Setpoint Level %

Element 4 T26 T6 T6 (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; (lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set; see Setpoint 1 Element 1 Setting Setting Setting 0 37 1 2 2 2

03,06,16

40233

Setpoint 4 Fourth Setpoint Parameter Group

03,06,16

40234

Setpoint 4 Fourth Hi Setpoint Level %

03,06,16

40235

Setpoint 4 Fourth Lo Setpoint Level %

Element 5 T26 T6 T6 see Setpoint 1 Element 1 (lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set; (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; Setting Setting Setting 0 37 1 2 2 2

03,06,16

40236

Setpoint 4 Fifth Setpoint Parameter Group

03,06,16

40237

Setpoint 4 Fifth Hi Setpoint Level %

03,06,16

40238

Setpoint 4 Fifth Lo Setpoint Level %

Element 6 T26 T6 see Setpoint 1 Element 1 (lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set; Setting Setting 0 37 1 2 2

03,06,16

40239

Setpoint 4 Sixth Setpoint Parameter Group

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 139 of 160

03,06,16

40240

Setpoint 4 Sixth Hi Setpoint Level %

Code

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

03,06,16 T6 Setting 2

40241

Setpoint 4 Sixth Lo Setpoint Level %

(upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set;

Element 7 T26 T6 T6 (upper limit of Low Set depends on l ower limit of High Set; Setting (lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set; Setting see Setpoint 1 Element 1 Setting 0 37 1 2 2 2

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

40242

Setpoint 4 Seventh Setpoint Parameter Group

03,06,16

40243

Setpoint 4 Seventh Hi Setpoint Level %

03,06,16

40244

Setpoint 4 Seventh Lo Setpoint Level %

Element 8 T26 T6 T6 (upper limit of Low Set depends on lower limit of High Set; (lower limit of High Set depends on upper limit of Low Set; Setting Setting see Setpoint 1 Element 1 Setting 0 37 1 2 2 2

03,06,16

40245

Setpoint 4 Eighth Setpoint Parameter Group

03,06,16

40246

Setpoint 4 Eighth Hi Setpoint Level %

03,06,16

40247

Setpoint 4 Eighth Lo Setpoint Level %

TARIFF STRUCTURE

RATE SWITCHING EVENTS

Rate Switching Event 1 T1 1 .. 7 T1 T1 T57 Bit-0 Bit-1 Bit-2 Bit-3 0 Monday .. Friday Hour of the switching time Minutes of the switching time No rate registers are active Rate register 1 is active Rate register 2 is active Rate register 3 is active Rate register 4 is active Setting Setting Setting 0 0 0 23 59 255 1 1 2 2 0 Inactive switching event Setting 0 7 1 2

03,06,16

40248

Activation Day

03,06,16

40249

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40250

Activation Minute

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 140 of 160

03,06,16

40251

Active Rates

ode Bit-4 Bit-5 Bit-6 Bit-7 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 Rate register 8 is active Rate register 7 is active Rate register 6 is active Rate register 5 is active

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type Min

Max

Step

Passcode

Rate Switching Event 2

03,06,16

40252

Activation Day

03,06,16

40253

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40254

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40255

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 3

03,06,16

40256

Activation Day

03,06,16

40257

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40258

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40259

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 4

03,06,16

40260

Activation Day

03,06,16

40261

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40262

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40263

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 5

03,06,16

40264

Activation Day

03,06,16

40265

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40266

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40267

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 6

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 141 of 160

03,06,16

40268

Activation Day

ode T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

03,06,16

40269

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40270

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40271

Activation Rates

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Rate Switching Event 7

03,06,16

40272

Activation Day

03,06,16

40273

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40274

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40275

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 8

03,06,16

40276

Activation Day

03,06,16

40277

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40278

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40279

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 9

03,06,16

40280

Activation Day

03,06,16

40281

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40282

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40283

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 10

03,06,16

40284

Activation Day

03,06,16

40285

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40286

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40287

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 11

03,06,16

40288

Activation Day

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 142 of 160

03,06,16

40289

Activation Hour

Code T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

03,06,16

40290

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40291

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 12

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

40292

Activation Day

03,06,16

40293

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40294

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40295

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 13

03,06,16

40296

Activation Day

03,06,16

40297

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40298

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40299

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 14

03,06,16

40300

Activation Day

03,06,16

40301

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40302

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40303

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 15

03,06,16

40304

Activation Day

03,06,16

40305

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40306

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40307

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 16

03,06,16

40308

Activation Day

03,06,16

40309

Activation Hour

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 143 of 160

03,06,16

40310

Activation Minute

Code T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

03,06,16

40311

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 17

03,06,16

40312

Activation Day

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

40313

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40314

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40315

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 18

03,06,16

40316

Activation Day

03,06,16

40317

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40318

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40319

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 19

03,06,16

40320

Activation Day

03,06,16

40321

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40322

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40323

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 20

03,06,16

40324

Activation Day

03,06,16

40325

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40326

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40327

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 21

03,06,16

40328

Activation Day

03,06,16

40329

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40330

Activation Minute

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 144 of 160

03,06,16

40331

Activation Rates

Code Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

Rate Switching Event 22

03,06,16

40332

Activation Day

03,06,16

40333

Activation Hour

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

40334

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40335

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 23

03,06,16

40336

Activation Day

03,06,16

40337

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40338

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40339

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 24

03,06,16

40340

Activation Day

03,06,16

40341

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40342

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40343

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 25

03,06,16

40344

Activation Day

03,06,16

40345

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40346

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40347

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 26

03,06,16

40348

Activation Day

03,06,16

40349

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40350

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40351

Activation Rates

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 145 of 160

Rate Switching Event 27

03,06,16

40352

Activation Day

Code T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

03,06,16

40353

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40354

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40355

Activation Rates

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Rate Switching Event 28

03,06,16

40356

Activation Day

03,06,16

40357

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40358

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40359

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 29

03,06,16

40360

Activation Day

03,06,16

40361

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40362

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40363

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 30

03,06,16

40364

Activation Day

03,06,16

40365

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40366

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40367

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 31

03,06,16

40368

Activation Day

03,06,16

40369

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40370

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40371

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 32

03,06,16

40372

Activation Day

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 146 of 160

03,06,16

40373

Activation Hour

Code T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

03,06,16

40374

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40375

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 33

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

40376

Activation Day

03,06,16

40377

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40378

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40379

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 34

03,06,16

40380

Activation Day

03,06,16

40381

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40382

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40383

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 35

03,06,16

40384

Activation Day

03,06,16

40385

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40386

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40387

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 36

03,06,16

40388

Activation Day

03,06,16

40389

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40390

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40391

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 37

03,06,16

40392

Activation Day

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 147 of 160

03,06,16

40393

Activation Hour

Code T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

03,06,16

40394

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40395

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 38

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

40396

Activation Day

03,06,16

40397

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40398

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40399

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 39

03,06,16

40400

Activation Day

03,06,16

40401

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40402

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40403

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 40

03,06,16

40404

Activation Day

03,06,16

40405

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40406

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40407

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 41

03,06,16

40408

Activation Day

03,06,16

40409

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40410

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40411

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 42

03,06,16

40412

Activation Day

03,06,16

40413

Activation Hour

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 148 of 160

03,06,16

40414

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40415

Activation Rates

Code Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57 Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

Rate Switching Event 43

03,06,16

40416

Activation Day

03,06,16

40417

Activation Hour

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

40418

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40419

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 44

03,06,16

40420

Activation Day

03,06,16

40421

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40422

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40423

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 45

03,06,16

40424

Activation Day

03,06,16

40425

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40426

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40427

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 46

03,06,16

40428

Activation Day

03,06,16

40429

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40430

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40431

Activation Rates

Rate Switching Event 47

03,06,16

40432

Activation Day

03,06,16

40433

Activation Hour

03,06,16

40434

Activation Minute

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 149 of 160

03,06,16

40435

Activation Rates

Code Field attributes are as Rate Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 T57

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

Rate Switching Event 48

03,06,16

40436

Activation Day

03,06,16

40437

Activation Hour

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

40438

Activation Minute

03,06,16

40439

Activation Rates

SEASON SWITCHING EVENTS

Season Switching Event 1 T1 1..12 T1 T1 Field attributes are as Season Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 Field attributes are as Season Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 Field attributes are as Season Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 Field attributes are as Season Switching Event 1 T1 T1 Setting Setting January to December 1 1 31 12 1 1 2 2 0 Disabled Setting 0 12 1 2

03,06,16

40440

Switching month

03,06,16

40441

Switching day of month

03,06,16

40442

New Season

Season Switching Event 2

03,06,16

40443

Switching month

03,06,16

40444

Switching day of month

03,06,16

40445

New Season

Season Switching Event 3

03,06,16

40446

Switching month

03,06,16

40447

Switching day of month

03,06,16

40448

New Season

Season Switching Event 4

03,06,16

40449

Switching month

03,06,16

40450

Switching day of month

03,06,16

40451

New Season

Season Switching Event 5

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 150 of 160

03,06,16

40452

Switching month

03,06,16

40453

Switching day of month

Code T1 Field attributes are as Season Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 Field attributes are as Season Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 Field attributes are as Season Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 Field attributes are as Season Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 Field attributes are as Season Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1 Field attributes are as Season Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

03,06,16

40454

New Season

Season Switching Event 6

03,06,16

40455

Switching month

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

40456

Switching day of month

03,06,16

40457

New Season

Season Switching Event 7

03,06,16

40458

Switching month

03,06,16

40459

Switching day of month

03,06,16

40460

New Season

Season Switching Event 8

03,06,16

40461

Switching month

03,06,16

40462

Switching day of month

03,06,16

40463

New Season

Season Switching Event 9

03,06,16

40464

Switching month

03,06,16

40465

Switching day of month

03,06,16

40466

New Season

Season Switching Event 10

03,06,16

40467

Switching month

03,06,16

40468

Switching day of month

03,06,16

40469

New Season

Season Switching Event 11

03,06,16

40470

Switching month

03,06,16

40471

Switching day of month

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 151 of 160

03,06,16

40472

New Season

Code Field attributes are as Season Switching Event 1 T1 T1 T1

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

Season Switching Event 12

03,06,16

40473

Switching month

03,06,16

40474

Switching day of month

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

40475

New Season

Switching Events In Season T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Setting 0 Setting 0 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 Setting 0 48 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 48 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

03,06,16

40476

Season 1

03,06,16

40477

Season 2

03,06,16

40478

Season 3

03,06,16

40479

Season 4

03,06,16

40480

Season 5

03,06,16

40481

Season 6

03,06,16

40482

Season 7

03,06,16

40483

Season 8

03,06,16

40484

Season 9

03,06,16

40485

Season 10

03,06,16

40486

Season 11

03,06,16

40487

Season 12

FIXED DAY EXCLUSIONS

Fixed Day Exclusion 1 T1 0 Exclusion not used Setting 0 52 1 2

03,06,16

40488

Exclusion Week

1 .. 52 Week number of year T1 T1 T1 Field attributes are as Fixed Day Exclusion 1 T1 Setting Setting Setting 1 1 1 7 12 7 1 1 1 2 2 2

03,06,16

40489

Exclusion Day

03,06,16

40490

Season To Use

03,06,16

40491

Day To Use

Fixed Day Exclusion 2

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 152 of 160

03,06,16

40492

Exclusion Week

Code T1 T1 T1 Field attributes are as Fixed Day Exclusion 1 T1 T1 T1 T1 Field attributes are as Fixed Day Exclusion 1 T1 T1 T1 T1 Field attributes are as Fixed Day Exclusion 1 T1 T1 T1 T1 Field attributes are as Fixed Day Exclusion 1 T1 T1 T1 T1 Field attributes are as Fixed Day Exclusion 1 T1 T1

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

03,06,16

40493

Exclusion Day

03,06,16

40494

Season To Use

03,06,16

40495

Day To Use

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

Fixed Day Exclusion 3

03,06,16

40496

Exclusion Week

03,06,16

40497

Exclusion Day

03,06,16

40498

Season To Use

03,06,16

40499

Day To Use

Fixed Day Exclusion 4

03,06,16

40500

Exclusion Week

03,06,16

40501

Exclusion Day

03,06,16

40502

Season To Use

03,06,16

40503

Day To Use

Fixed Day Exclusion 5

03,06,16

40504

Exclusion Week

03,06,16

40505

Exclusion Day

03,06,16

40506

Season To Use

03,06,16

40507

Day To Use

Fixed Day Exclusion 6

03,06,16

40508

Exclusion Week

03,06,16

40509

Exclusion Day

03,06,16

40510

Season To Use

03,06,16

40511

Day To Use

Fixed Day Exclusion 7

03,06,16

40512

Exclusion Week

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 153 of 160

03,06,16

40513

Exclusion Day

Code T1 T1 Field attributes are as Fixed Day Exclusion 1 T1 T1 T1 T1

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

03,06,16

40514

Season To Use

03,06,16

40515

Day To Use

Fixed Day Exclusion 8

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

40516

Exclusion Week

03,06,16

40517

Exclusion Day

03,06,16

40518

Season To Use

03,06,16

40519

Day To Use

FIXED DATE EXCLUSIONS

Fixed Date Exclusion 1 T1 1 .. 12 Month of year T1 T1 T1 Field attributes are as Fixed Date Exclusion 1 T1 T1 T1 T1 Field attributes are as Fixed Date Exclusion 1 T1 T1 T1 T1 Setting Setting Setting 1 1 1 31 12 7 1 1 1 2 2 2 0 Exclusion not used Setting 1 12 1 2

03,06,16

40520

Exclusion Month

03,06,16

40521

Exclusion Day Of Month

03,06,16

40522

Season To Use

03,06,16

40523

Day To Use

Fixed Date Exclusion 2

03,06,16

40524

Exclusion Month

03,06,16

40525

Exclusion Day Of Month

03,06,16

40526

Season To Use

03,06,16

40527

Day To Use

Fixed Date Exclusion 3

03,06,16

40528

Exclusion Month

03,06,16

40529

Exclusion Day Of Month

03,06,16

40530

Season To Use

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 154 of 160

03,06,16

40531

Day To Use

Code Field attributes are as Fixed Date Exclusion 1 T1 T1 T1 T1 Field attributes are as Fixed Date Exclusion 1 T1 T1 T1 T1 Field attributes are as Fixed Date Exclusion 1 T1 T1 T1 T1 Field attributes are as Fixed Date Exclusion 1 T1 T1 T1 T1 Field attributes are as Fixed Date Exclusion 1 T1 T1 T1 T1

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

Fixed Date Exclusion 4

03,06,16

40532

Exclusion Month

03,06,16

40533

Exclusion Day Of Month

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

40534

Season To Use

03,06,16

40535

Day To Use

Fixed Date Exclusion 5

03,06,16

40536

Exclusion Month

03,06,16

40537

Exclusion Day Of Month

03,06,16

40538

Season To Use

03,06,16

40539

Day To Use

Fixed Date Exclusion 6

03,06,16

40540

Exclusion Month

03,06,16

40541

Exclusion Day Of Month

03,06,16

40542

Season To Use

03,06,16

40543

Day To Use

Fixed Date Exclusion 7

03,06,16

40544

Exclusion Month

03,06,16

40545

Exclusion Day Of Month

03,06,16

40546

Season To Use

03,06,16

40547

Day To Use

Fixed Date Exclusion 8

03,06,16

40548

Exclusion Month

03,06,16

40549

Exclusion Day Of Month

03,06,16

40550

Season To Use

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 155 of 160

03,06,16

40551

Day To Use

Code

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

RATE REGISTER CONFIGURATION T1 0 1 2 3 T1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 Field attributes are as Rate register 1 data source Field attributes are as Rate register 1 data source Field attributes are as Rate register 1 data source Field attributes are as Rate register 1 data source Field attributes are as Rate register 1 data source Field attributes are as Rate register 1 data source Field attributes are as Rate register 1 data source 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Export Total kVArh 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Import total kVArh Export Total kWh Import Total kWh Setting 0 3 1 2

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

40552

Rate register 1 data source

03,06,16

40553

Rate register 2 data source

03,06,16

40554

Rate register 3 data source

03,06,16

40555

Rate register 4 data source

03,06,16

40556

Rate register 5 data source

03,06,16

40557

Rate register 6 data source

03,06,16

40558

Rate register 7 data source

03,06,16

40559

Rate register 8 data source

DISTURBANCE RECORDER SETTINGS T1 1 T1 1 2 3 0 0 24 samples to be stored for each channel in a record 48 samples to be stored for each channel in a record 1 disturbance record (36 or 72 cycles, 2 disturbance record (36 or 72 cycles, 3 disturbance record (36 or 72 cycles, 4 disturbance record (36 or 72 cycles, Setting 0 3 1 2 Setting 0 1 1 2

03,06,16

40560

Samples per Cycle

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 156 of 160

03,06,16

40561

Record Configuration

Code T1 Setting Setting 0 2^32 1 2 0 (note 16) 1 2 T58 Setpoint 1, element 1 ... Setpoint 4, element 8 (bit-mask) T57 Opto input 1 ... Opto input 2 (bit-mask) 0 None Setting 0 3 1 2 0 None Number of sample required to be stored after trigger point

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type Min

Max

Step

Passcode

03,06,16

40562

Post-trigger cycles

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

40563

40564

Setpoint Trigger

03,06,16

40565

Opto Input Trigger

TRIGGER WAVEFORM ANALYSIS AND DISTURBANCE RECORDER COMMAND

03,06,16 0 1 2 3 4 Trigger Disturbance Recorder Analyse Phase C Voltage and Current Analyse Phase B Voltage and Current Analyse Phase A Voltage and Current Off Setting

40566

Waveform Capture/ Disturbance Record Command Register T34

READ DISTURBANCE RECORDS AND WAVEFORM ANALYSIS T37 1 T42 1 2 3 T55 0 1 Oldest record to be extracted Timer channel First channel set in Available Channel (left to right) and so on... Setting 0 10 1 0 0 Disturbance Recorder Newest record to be extracted Setting 0 3 1 0 0 Waveform Analysis Setting 0 1 1 0

03,06,16

40567

Select Record Type

03,06,16

40568

Select Disturbance Record Number

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 157 of 160

03,06,16

40569

Select Channel Number

Code T1 Setting 0 269 1 0 Waveform analysis or disturbance record sample page.

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

40570

Select Sample Page

READ EVENT RECORDS T36 Setting 0 99 1 0

03,06,16

40571

Select Event Record Number

ADDITIONAL DATA ITEMS SINCE ISSUE G T1 Setting 50 (This data item to be placed under System Data section.) 60 10 50

03,06,16

40572

Frequency

INTERNAL FACTORY SETTINGS

System Data T30 T23 T54 Password to attempt factory access level upgrade Setting Setting Setting 41h 20h 20h 5Ah 7Eh 7Eh 1 1 1 0 Config Mode Config Mode

06,16

41001

41003

Factory Password

03,06,16

41004

41007

Serial Number

03,06,16

41008

41015

Model Number

System Commands T32 2 4 8 16 32 1 Enter Calibration mode Exit from Calibration mode Abort Calibration mode Enter Configuration mode Exit from Configuration mode Abort Configuration mode Setting 1 32 3

06,16

41016

Factory Command Register

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 158 of 160

Code

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

Calibration Settings 1 Setting 1 12 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 T1 2 4 8 16 1 Test Relays Open (Calibration Mode Only) Test LEDs On (Calibration Mode Only) Test LEDs Off (Calibration Mode Only) Acknowledge Analogue inputs Calibration success Acknowledge Analogue inputs Calibration Failed Acknowledge d.c. millivolt input offset Calibration success Acknowledge d.c. millivolt input offset Calibration Failed Acknowledge d.c. millivolt input full scale Calibration success Setting 0 1023 Calib Mode Test Relays Closed (Calibration Mode only) Analogue output actual values loaded (Calibration Mode Only) Analogue input actual values loaded (Calibration Mode Only) Calibrate Base Temperature (Calibration Mode Only) Calibrate Analogue outputs (Calibration Mode Only) Calibrate d.c. millivolt input full scale (Calibration Mode Only) Calibrate d.c. millivolt input offset (Calibration Mode Only) Calibrate Analogue inputs (Calibration Mode Only) Calib Mode

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

06,16

41017

Calibration Command Register T31

03,06,16

41018

Acknowledge Register

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 159 of 160

Code 32 64 128 256 512 T13 T13 T13 T13 T13 T13 T13 T13 T13 T13 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Setting 0 Acknowledge Base Temperture Calibration failed 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 0.00001 Calib Mode 0.00001 Calib Mode 0.00001 Calib Mode 0.00001 Calib Mode 0.00001 Calib Mode 0.00001 Calib Mode 0.00001 Calib Mode 0.00001 Calib Mode 0.00001 Calib Mode 0.00001 Calib Mode Acknowledge Base Temperture Calibration success Acknowledge Analogue outputs Calibration Failed Acknowledge Analogue outputs Calibration success Acknowledge d.c. millivolt input full scale Calibration Failed

Address

Contents

Data

Ind

Values / Dependencies

Reg. Type

Min

Max

Step

Passcode

SERVICE MANUAL M301, M302

03,06,16

41019

41020

Va Calibration Actual Value

03,06,16

41021

41022

Ia Calibration Actual Value

03,06,16

41023

41024

Vb Calibration Actual Value

03,06,16

41025

41026

Ib Calibration Actual Value

03,06,16

41027

41028

Vc Calibration Actual Value

03,06,16

41029

41030

Ic Calibration Actual Value

03,06,16

41031

41032

Analogue Output 1 Actual Value

03,06,16

41033

41034

Analogue Output 2 Actual Value

03,06,16

41035

41036

Analogue Output 3 Actual Value

03,06,16

41037

41038

Analogue Output 4 Actual Value

03,06,16 T59 23130

41039

Reprogram Flash Memory Command

R8605A Volume 2 Chapter 5 Page 160 of 160

A pattern of 0x05A5A need to be entered in order to execute the command.

Setting

2^16

Calib Mode

REPAIR FORM
Please complete this form and return it to ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control Limited with the equipment to be repaired. This form may also be used in the case of application queries.

ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control Limited St. Leonards Works Stafford ST17 4LX, England For: After Sales Service Department _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ Model No: __________________ Serial No: __________________

Customer Ref: GECA Contract Ref: Date: 1.

What parameters were in use at the time the fault occurred? AC volts DC volts AC current Frequency _____________ Main VT/Test set _____________ Battery/Power supply _____________ Main CT/Test set _____________

2. 3. 4.

Which type of test was being used? ____________________________________________ Were all the external components fitted where required? (Delete as appropriate.) List the relay settings being used ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ Yes/No

5.

What did you expect to happen? ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________

continued overleaf

6.

What did happen? ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________

7.

When did the fault occur? Instant Time delayed By how long? Yes/No Yes/No ___________ Intermittent Yes/No

(Delete as appropriate).

8.

What indications if any did the relay show? ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________

9.

Was there any visual damage? ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________

10. Any other remarks which may be useful: ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________ Signature ______________________________________ Name (in capitals)

_______________________________________ Title _______________________________________ Company name

A L S T O M T & D P r o t e c t i o n & C o n t r o l L t d St Leonards Works, Stafford, ST17 4LX England Tel: 44 (0) 1785 223251 Fax: 44 (0) 1785 212232 Email: pcs.enquiries@tde.alstom.com Internet: www.alstom.com
1999 ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control Ltd Our policy is one of continuous product development and the right is reserved to supply equipment which may vary from that described.

Publication R8605B

Printed in England.

Potrebbero piacerti anche